add eqexam

1 files changed, 8258 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/eqexam/eqexam.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/eqexam/eqexam.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..951c5f74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/eqexam/eqexam.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,8258 @@
+% \iffalse
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o eqexam.gls eqexam.glo
+% makeindex -s gind.ist -o eqexam.ind eqexam.idx
+%<*copyright>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% eqexam.sty package,                                  %%
+%% Copyright (C) 2005--2017  D. P. Story                %%
+%%   dpstory@uakron.edu                                 %%
+%%                                                      %%
+%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
+%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License 1.2    %%
+%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory          %%
+%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the  %%
+%% License, or (at your option) any later version.      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%</copyright>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{eqexam}
+%<package> [2017/03/16 v4.9 An Exam Construction Package (dps)]
+%<package>\def\eqexamdefReq{2017/03/16}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GlossaryPrologue{\section{{Change History}}}%
+\IndexPrologue{\section{{Index}}}%
+\value{IndexColumns}=2
+\value{GlossaryColumns}=2
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex]{hyperref}
+%\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}%
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\RecordChanges
+\InputIfFileExists{aebdocfmt.def}{\PackageInfo{eqexam}{Inputting aebdocfmt.def}}
+    {\def\IndexOpt{\DescribeMacro}\let\setupFullwidth\relax
+     \PackageInfo{eqexam}{aebdocfmt.def cannot be found}}
+\begin{document}
+    \let\pkg\textsf
+    \def\switchCats{\catcode`\{=12\relax\catcode`\}=12\relax
+    \catcode`\(=1\relax\catcode`\)=2\relax}
+  \GetFileInfo{eqexam.sty}
+  \title{\textsf{eqexam}: An Exam Construction Package}
+    \author{D. P. Story\\
+      Email: \texttt{dpstory@uakron.edu}}
+    \date{Processed \today}
+  \maketitle
+  \tableofcontents
+  \let\Email\texttt
+  \DocInput{eqexam.dtx}
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.ind}{\newpage\setupFullwidth\PrintIndex}{\paragraph*{Index} The index goes here.\\Execute
+    \texttt{makeindex -s gind.ist -o eqexam.ind eqexam.idx} on the command line and recompile
+    \texttt{eqexam.dtx}.}
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{\PrintChanges}{\paragraph*{Change History} The list of changes goes here.\\Execute
+    \texttt{makeindex -s gglo.ist -o eqexam.gls eqexam.glo} on the command line and recompile
+    \texttt{eqexam.dtx}.}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \InputIfFileExists{aebDoNotIndex.def}{\PackageInfo{eqexam}{Inputting aebDoNotIndex.def}}
+%    {\PackageInfo{eqexam}{aebDoNotIndex.def cannot be found}}
+%
+%    \section{Introduction}
+%
+%    This package is my attempt at writing a set of macros for creating exams.
+%    The package can be used with or without \textsf{web} or \textsf{exerquiz}.
+%    When used without, what is produced is a document suitable for printing.
+%    When \textsf{exerquiz} is used, the same document is produced, but with
+%    hypertext links to solutions. This may be useful for publishing solutions
+%    on the web, or publishing pretests with/without solutions.
+%
+%    The package must be as flexible as possible vis-\`a-vis PDF. (1)
+%    \textsf{web} only does not add much, it does input hyperrref and test info
+%    such as \cs{title}, \cs{subject}, etc are placed in the Document Info
+%    fields of the PDF. (2) If \textsf{exerquiz} is also input (prior to
+%    \textsf{eqexam}), then hyperlinks will be created to the solutions to the
+%    test, if solutions are included at the end of the document. (3) If
+%    \textsf{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} are input, and the \texttt{online}
+%    option is taken, then the checkboxes will be come interactive, the space
+%    left to work the problems will be multi-line text boxes, fill-ins limited
+%    to True/False and simple text fill-in the blank will also become text
+%    boxes.
+%
+%    When in \texttt{online} mode, the student can take the test in a computer
+%    lab, the completed exam can be printed and handed in, or perhaps submitted
+%    server-side script.
+%
+%    \medskip\noindent (2011/05/13) The version of \textsf{eqexam} is a
+%    departure from previous versions. Previously, the list of problems were
+%    not in list, they were left-justified, with the problem number extending
+%    out into a little area determined by \cs{oddsidemargin}. This makes it
+%    hard to reformat a list of problems to fit into a custom book format.
+%    This new version defines a new environment, \texttt{eqequestions}, that
+%    makes each problem into a list. The list environment allows for an easy
+%    redesign of the formatting of the problems. The purpose of this new
+%    scheme, is to open up \textsf{eqexam} as a format package that can be used
+%    by author for writing a textbook.
+%
+%    The \texttt{fortextbook} option supplies support for authors writing a
+%    textbook. The \texttt{exam} environment is re-cast into the
+%    \texttt{probset} environment, it can be used to write problem sets within
+%    the text. there is a version for the instructor and the student. The
+%    instructors version writes answers to the problem sets to the margins (or
+%    inline). Two solutions are offered, short and long. The short solutions
+%    appear in the back of the book (odd-numbered ones for the student edition.
+%    The long solutions are used to build the stand-alone solutions manuals for
+%    both the student and the instructor. More details are found in
+%    \Nameref{fortextbook}, see also \Nameref{fortextbookstyle}.
+%
+% \newpage
+%    \section{Package options and  Process Options}
+%    Let us catalog the options of this package.
+%
+%    \subsection{Early inclusion of packages}
+%    We include these packages early in the process of loading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v3.1b}{2012/06/18}{New requirement \textsf{ifpdf}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{ifpdf}[2006/02/20]
+\RequirePackage{ifxetex}[2006/08/21]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Very useful package for defining key-values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{xkeyval}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \subsection{Options New to \textsf{eqexam}}
+%    Here are some options unique to this package.
+%    \IndexOpt{usecustomdesign}
+% Use this option to avoid \textsf{eqexam} from setting up the ``standard'' page layout.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{usecustomdesign}{\eqcustomdesigntrue}
+\newif\ifeqcustomdesign \eqcustomdesignfalse
+\DeclareOptionX{nocustomdesign}{\let\eqe@nocustomdesign=1}
+\let\eqe@nocustomdesign=0
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{fortextbook}
+%    An option to extend the application of \textsf{eqexam} to provide support
+%    (exercises, providing solutions, short solutions, answers, and hints) for
+%    authors writing textbooks. See \Nameref{fortextbook}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{fortextbook}{\eqfortextbooktrue}
+\newif\ifeqfortextbook \eqfortextbookfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{forinstr}
+%    \IndexOpt{forstudent}
+%    These two options simply set a switch to signal the intention of the
+%    document author.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{forinstr}{\eqforinstrtrue}
+\DeclareOptionX{forstudent}{\eqforinstrfalse}
+\newif\ifeqforinstr \eqforinstrfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{nomarginwrite}
+%    The switch \cs{ifeqwritetomargins} is used by the \texttt{fortextbook}
+%    option. It is normally \texttt{true}, but if set to \texttt{false}, the
+%    \cs{AddToShipoutPicture} is not generated at the beginning of the
+%    document. Here is the code taken from below:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%   \ifeqfortextbook\ifeqwritetomargins
+%   \AtBeginDocument{\chkmarginboxwidth
+%       \AddToShipoutPicture{\eqe@tb@shipout}}
+%   \fi\fi
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    Using this option, the check for the margin width is not done,
+%    and writing to the margins is turned off.
+%    (\cs{marginpar} still works)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{nomarginwrite}{\eqwritetomarginsfalse}
+\newif\ifeqwritetomargins\eqwritetomarginstrue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph*{Configuration Files.}
+% This section contains options for the configuration files.
+%    \IndexOpt{cfg}
+% The \texttt{cfg} option is used to specify a named configuration file, extension
+% must be \texttt{.cfg}; usage \texttt{cfg=hwdoc}.
+%\changes{v3.0u}{2012/09/03}{Added the \texttt{cfg} option for inputting
+% a custom config file.}
+%\changes{v3.1d}{2012/09/29}{Added \cs{ifeqexamCFG} and cs{eqexamCFG}; these are
+% used by \textsf{ATB} to attached the configuration file.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{eqexam.sty}{cfg}[]{%
+    \def\arg@i{#1}\ifx\arg@i\@empty
+    \PackageWarning{eqexam}{No value for `cfg' specified}\else
+    \def\ifeqexamCFG{true}\def\eqexamCFG{#1.cfg}%
+    \AtEndOfPackage{\InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}
+    {\typeout{Inputting #1.cfg}}{\PackageWarning{eqexam}{%
+        Cannot find configuration file #1.cfg}}}\fi
+    }
+\def\ifeqexamCFG{false}
+\let\eqexamCFG\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{myconfig}\IndexOpt{myconfigi...myconfigvi}
+%    We offer seven sets of configuration files, that should be enough, especially
+%    light of the new \texttt{cfg} option, defined above.
+%    \changes{v3.0t}{2012/25/01}{Added four more CFG files are the request
+%    of a user.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@for\eqe@tmp@i:={},i,ii,iii,iv,v,vi\do{%
+    \edef\eqe@tmp@exp{%
+    \noexpand\DeclareOptionX{myconfig\eqe@tmp@i}%
+        {\noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{\expandafter\noexpand
+            \csname eqemyconfig\eqe@tmp@i\endcsname}}%
+    }\eqe@tmp@exp
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{Point options.}
+%    Options relating to points, points on left, right, both, no points,
+%    totals on left and right.
+%    \IndexOpt{pointsonleft}
+%    \IndexOpt{pointsonright}
+%    \IndexOpt{pointsonboth}
+%    \IndexOpt{nopoints}
+%    \IndexOpt{totalsonleft}
+%    \IndexOpt{totalsonright}
+%    \IndexOpt{nozerototals}
+%    We offer options for points and totals.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{pointsonleft}{\AtEndOfPackage{\PointsOnLeft}}
+\DeclareOptionX{pointsonright}{\AtEndOfPackage{\PointsOnRight}}
+\DeclareOptionX{pointsonboth}{\AtEndOfPackage{\PointsOnBothSides}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nopoints}{\AtEndOfPackage{\NoPoints}}
+\DeclareOptionX{totalsonleft}{\AtEndOfPackage{\TotalsOnLeft}}
+\DeclareOptionX{totalsonright}{\AtEndOfPackage{\TotalsOnRight}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nozerototals}{\AtEndOfPackage{\noZeroTotals}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{Totals options.}
+%
+%    \IndexOpt{nototals}
+%    \IndexOpt{noparttotals}
+%    \IndexOpt{parttotalsonright}
+%    \IndexOpt{parttotalsonleft}
+%    \IndexOpt{noseparationrule}
+%    \IndexOpt{nosummarytotals}
+%    Options relating to totals
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eqe@YES=y \let\eqe@NO=n
+\let\eqe@One=1 \let\eqe@Zero=0
+\let\eqe@Two=2 \let\eqe@Three=3 \let\eqe@Four=4
+\DeclareOptionX{nototals}{\AtEndOfPackage{\NoTotals}}
+\DeclareOptionX{noparttotals}{%
+    \AtEndOfPackage{\let\eq@parttotals\eqe@NO}}
+\DeclareOptionX{parttotalsonright}{%
+    \def\eqeomarginbox{\eqeomarginboxright}}
+\DeclareOptionX{parttotalsonleft}{%
+    \def\eqeomarginbox{\eqeomarginboxleft}}
+\def\eqeomarginbox{\eqeomarginboxright}
+\DeclareOptionX{noseparationrule}{%
+    \AtEndOfPackage{\separationruleOff}}
+%    \AtEndOfPackage{\let\separationrule\relax}}
+\DeclareOptionX{nosummarytotals}{\let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{cover page options.} There are two such options,
+%    \texttt{coverpage} and \texttt{cover\-page\-sumry}.
+%    \IndexOpt{coverpage}
+%    If this option is taken, a cover page is generate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{coverpage}{\def\eqex@coverpage{\eqexcoverpage}%
+    \setcounter{page}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{coverpagesumry}
+%    If this option is taken, an \textbf{Exam Record} is generated on the
+%    cover page, provided the \texttt{coverpage} option is taken. Possible
+%    values aer \texttt{byparts}, \texttt{bypages}, or \texttt{none}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{eqexam.sty}{coverpagesumry}[\val\nr]%
+    {byparts,bypages,none}{%
+    \ifcase\nr\relax
+        \def\sumryAnnots{\cpSumrybyparts}\or
+        \def\sumryAnnots{\cpSumrybypages}\or
+        \let\sumryAnnots\relax
+    \fi
+}{\PackageWarning{aeb}{Bad choice for coverpagesumry, permissible values
+   are byparts, bypages, and none. Try again}}
+\let\sumryAnnots\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{Options related to how the document is built.}
+%
+%    \IndexOpt{nospacetowork}
+%    The vertical space defined by the solution environment is removed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{nospacetowork}{%
+    \AtEndOfPackage{\let\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@NO}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{answerkey}
+% Equivalent to solutionsafter and proofing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifanswerkey \answerkeyfalse
+\DeclareOptionX{answerkey}{\AnswerKey}
+\def\AnswerKey{\answerkeytrue\eq@proofingtrue
+    \eq@solutionsaftertrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{vspacewithsolns}
+%    When \texttt{vspacewithsolns} is used, vertical space is created by
+%    the solutions environment, and the solutions are written to the
+%    end of the file.
+%    \changes{v2.0d}{2011/03/04}{%
+%       Added the \texttt{vspacewithsolns} option}
+%    \IndexOpt{ftbsolns}
+%    Added \texttt{ftbsolns} as an alias for \texttt{vspacewithsolns}
+%    \changes{v3.0h}{2011/08/17}{% 2011/08/17 v3.0h Added the
+%    \texttt{vspacewithsolns} option}. This is implemented through
+%    a Boolean switch \cs{ifvspacewithsolns}, which I'm sorry now I've made
+%    so long. To make up for that bad decision, I also define
+%    \DescribeMacro{\ifkeyalt}\cmd{ifkeyalt} to be \cmd{\ifvspacewithsolns}
+%    with making conditional decisions, of course, one cannot say
+%    \cs{keyalttrue}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifvspacewithsolns\vspacewithsolnsfalse
+\def\ifkeyalt{\csname ifvspacewithsolns\endcsname}
+\def\ifkeyOrkeyalt{\ifanswerkey
+    \def\eqe@next{\csname iftrue\endcsname}\else
+    \ifvspacewithsolns\def\eqe@next{\csname iftrue\endcsname}\else
+    \def\eqe@next{\csname iffalse\endcsname}\fi\fi\eqe@next}
+\DeclareOptionX{vspacewithsolns}{%
+    \vspacewithsolnstrue\displayworkareatrue}
+\DeclareOptionX{ftbsolns}{%
+    \vspacewithsolnstrue\displayworkareatrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{useforms}
+%    Use forms (if online option is taken); otherwise draw rectangles for
+%    multiple choice/multiple selection questions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{useforms}{\AtEndOfPackage{\def\sqstar{*}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{allowcirc4mc}
+% This option uses \texttt{lcircle10} to draw circles around multiple choice questions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifallowcircmc \allowcircmcfalse
+\DeclareOptionX{allowcirc4mc}{\allowcircmctrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{PDF Options} The various options to go beyond paper!
+%
+%    \IndexOpt{online}
+%    \IndexOpt{pdf}
+%    \IndexOpt{links}
+%    \IndexOpt{email}
+%    Options related to the interactive capability of \textsf{eqexam}.
+%    \changes{v3.1b}{2012/06/18}{Added \cs{eqe@auto@chk@drivers}}
+%    For each of the PDF options, we auto-check for \textsf{pdftex}
+%    and \textsf{xetex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@auto@chk@drivers{\ifpdf\ExecuteOptionsX{pdftex}\else
+    \ifxetex\ExecuteOptionsX{xetex}\fi\fi}
+\newif\ifeqeonline \eqeonlinefalse
+\DeclareOptionX{online}{\eqe@auto@chk@drivers
+    \let\eq@online\eqe@YES\eqeonlinetrue\ExecuteOptionsX{links}}
+\DeclareOptionX{pdf}{\eqe@auto@chk@drivers\let\load@web\eqe@YES}
+\DeclareOptionX{links}{\eqe@auto@chk@drivers
+    \let\load@web\eqe@YES\let\load@exerquiz\eqe@YES}
+\DeclareOptionX{email}{\eqe@auto@chk@drivers
+    \let\use@email\eqe@YES\ExecuteOptionsX{online}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{obeylocalversions}
+%    This option is used for multiple versions of a document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifeqobeylocalversion \eqobeylocalversionfalse
+\DeclareOptionX{obeylocalversions}{\eqobeylocalversiontrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{usexkv}
+%    Causes the \textsf{xkeyval} package to be input, this option extends the
+%    option list of
+% \cs{fillIn}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{usexkv}{\let\eq@usexkeys\eqe@YES}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\texttt{2014/12/19} Now, the \texttt{usexkeys} is on by default.
+%\changes{v3.5a}{2014/12/19}{Made \texttt{usexkeys} as default}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eq@usexkeys\eqe@YES
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\paragraph*{Renditions} Options relating to renditions.
+%    \IndexOpt{max}
+%    \IndexOpt{rendition}
+%    The \texttt{max} and \texttt{rendition} option can be used instead of the
+%    \verb!\numVersions{2}! and \verb!\forVersion{a}!, respectively. These options
+%    allow you to set the version information though a package option. This allows us, for
+%    example, to use a \textsf{cfg} file such as \texttt{rendition.cfg} to dynamically set the version.
+%    This feature is used primarily by \textsf{AeB Exam Builder}.
+%    \changes{v2.0}{2010/03/05}
+%    {%
+%        Switched over to \textsf{xkeyval}, added max and rendition to be consistent
+%        with the renditions package, though we don't use the rendition package
+%        itself. \textsf{eqexam} has a more extensive renditions system already.
+%        Introduced this mostly for use AeB Exam Builder.
+%    }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eq@renditionOptions\@empty
+\let\eq@max@selected\@empty \let\eq@ren@selected\@empty
+\DeclareOptionX{max}{\def\eq@max@selected{#1}%
+    \g@addto@macro\eq@renditionOptions{\numVersions{#1}}}
+\DeclareOptionX{rendition}{\def\eq@ren@selected{#1}%
+    \g@addto@macro\eq@renditionOptions{\forVersion{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \paragraph*{Randomization} Options relating to randomization.
+%    \IndexOpt{allowrandomize}
+%    Use this option to randomize the choices of a multiple choice question.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{allowrandomize}{\AtEndOfPackage{\inputRandomizeChoices}}
+\def\inputRandomizeChoices{\InputIfFileExists{aebrandom.def}
+    {\typeout{inputting aebrandom.def}}{cannot find aebrandom.def}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{Set Misc. Defaults and Helper Macros.}
+%    We set some defaults, and define macros for use by the document author.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eq@online\eqe@NO
+\def\ifisOnline{\ifx\eq@online\eqe@YES}
+\let\use@email\eqe@NO
+\let\load@web\eqe@NO
+\let\load@exerquiz\eqe@NO
+\def\sqLinks{\def\sqstar{}}\sqLinks
+\def\sqForms{\def\sqstar{*}}
+\def\NoSpaceToWork{\let\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@NO}
+\def\SpaceToWork{\let\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@YES}
+\let\eq@nototals\eqe@NO
+\let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@NO
+\let\eq@parttotals\eqe@YES
+\let\eqx@separationrule\eqe@YES
+\let\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@YES
+\let\eqex@coverpage\relax
+\def\@reportpoints{0}
+\let\marginpoints\@empty
+\let\totalsbox=\hfil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \subsection{Options from and for \textsf{web}}
+%    \IndexOpt{forpaper}
+%    \IndexOpt{forcolorpaper}
+%    Here is the list of options of \textsf{exerquiz} we plan to recognize.
+%    \changes{v4.6a}{2016/06/04}{Added \string\cs{ifequsecolor} to easily distinguish between
+%    \string\texttt{forpaper} and \string\texttt{forcolorpaper} options.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ifequsecolor}{\newif\ifequsecolor\equsecolorfalse}{}
+\DeclareOptionX{forpaper}{\equsecolorfalse\eqforpapertrue
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{monochrome}{\eq@ColorPackage}}
+\DeclareOptionX{forcolorpaper}{\equsecolortrue\eqforpapertrue}  % for print
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{preview}
+%    Preview shows outlines for form fields.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{preview}{\previewtrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{webOpts}
+%    Pass options to \textsf{web}, when \texttt{pdf} or higher is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{eqexam.sty}{webOpts}[]{\def\eqe@webOpts{#1,\eqDriverName}}
+\def\eqe@webOpts{\eqDriverName}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \subsection{Options from and for \textsf{exerquiz}}
+%    Options from \textsf{exerquiz} that are useful for this package.
+%    \IndexOpt{exerquizOpts}
+%    Pass options to \textsf{exerquiz}, when \texttt{links} or higher is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{eqexam.sty}{exerquizOpts}[]{\def\eqe@eqOpts{#1,nodljs}}
+\def\eqe@eqOpts{nodljs}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{nosolutions}
+%    \IndexOpt{nohiddensolutions}
+%    \IndexOpt{noHiddensolutions}
+%    \IndexOpt{solutionsafter}
+%    \changes{v1.7b}{2007/21/07}{Added a \texttt{solutionsonly} option}
+%    \IndexOpt{solutionsonly}
+%    Solutions related options
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    dps 03/04/11
+\DeclareOptionX{nosolutions}{\eq@nolinktrue\eq@nosolutionstrue
+    \displayworkareatrue}
+\DeclareOptionX{nohiddensolutions}{\eq@globalshowsolutionstrue}
+\DeclareOptionX{noHiddensolutions}%
+    {\eq@globalshowsolutionstrue\AtBeginDocument{\def\Hidesymbol{h}}}
+\DeclareOptionX{solutionsafter}{\eq@solutionsaftertrue
+    \displayworkareafalse}
+\DeclareOptionX{solutionsonly}{%
+    \solutionsonlytrue\answerkeytrue\displayworkareafalse
+    \AtEndOfPackage{\therearesolutionstrue\let\exerSolnsHeadnToc\relax}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{proofing}
+%    The \texttt{proofing} option sets a switch that controls whether
+%    the checkbox for multiple choice questions appears, and whether
+%    the answer for the \cs{fillin} command appears. \cmd{\ifeq@proofing}
+%    is set to true when the \texttt{answerkey} option is taken.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{proofing}{\eq@proofingtrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We provide two helper commands for turning on or off proofing. These are
+%    \DescribeMacro{\showproofing}\cmd{\showproofing} for turning on proofing
+%    and \DescribeMacro{\hideproofing}\cmd{\hideproofing} for turning off proofing.
+%    There was some reason for defining these two, but can't remember now.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\showproofing}{\eq@proofingtrue}
+\newcommand{\hideproofing}{\eq@proofingfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \IndexOpt{showgrayletters}
+%    \changes{v1.7c}{2008/08/21}
+%    {
+%       Added the \texttt{showgrayletters} option to eqexam
+%       (ported from exerquiz)
+%    }
+%    When this option is in effect, capital letters in gray appear under
+%    the multiple choice question boxes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifaebshowgrayletters\aebshowgraylettersfalse
+\DeclareOptionX{showgrayletters}%
+    {\AtEndOfPackage{\aebshowgrayletterstrue}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\changes{v2.0i}{2011/04/17 }
+%{
+%   Added the switch \cs{ifdisplayworkarea} to better control when the
+%   work area is to be displayed.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifdisplayworkarea \displayworkareafalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \paragraph*{Color packages}
+%    We set the color package, \texttt{xcolor} preferred.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\IfFileExists{xcolor.sty}%
+{\def\eq@ColorPackage{xcolor}\def\eqe@color@opt{table}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{xcolor}{table}}
+{\def\eq@ColorPackage{color}\let\eqe@color@opt\@empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \DescribeMacro{noxcolor}\texttt{noxcolor} forces the use of the color package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{noxcolor}{\def\eq@ColorPackage{color}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title page options}
+% To\DescribeMacro{useclassmaketitle} support the use of eqexam outside a straight exam document, we allow the
+% user to bypass the redefinition of \cs{maketitle}. This is automatic
+% with the \texttt{fortextbook} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@eqeuseclassmaketitle \@eqeuseclassmaketitlefalse
+\DeclareOptionX{useclassmaketitle}{\@eqeuseclassmaketitletrue}
+\newif\if@bypasseqexamheading \@bypasseqexamheadingfalse
+\DeclareOptionX{bypasspkgpagestyle}{\@bypasseqexamheadingtrue
+    \ExecuteOptionsX{nototals}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Drivers Recognized}
+% These drivers are only relevant when
+% a \textsf{PDF} option is taken (\texttt{pdf}, \texttt{links}, \texttt{online}, \texttt{email}).
+% For ordinary paper documents, it is not necessary to specify the driver. If you
+% put the assignment/homework/test (solns) on the web, suggested option is \texttt{pdf},
+% this inputs hyperref, and the document info dialog is filled in.
+%    \IndexOpt{dvipsone}
+%    \IndexOpt{dvips}
+%    \IndexOpt{pdftex}
+%    \IndexOpt{dvipdfm}
+%    \IndexOpt{dvipdfmx}
+%    \IndexOpt{xetex}
+%    \IndexOpt{textures}
+% The list of recognized and supported drivers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{dvipsone}{%
+    \def\eqe@drivernum{0}\def\eqDriverName{dvipsone}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{dvipsone}}
+\DeclareOptionX{dvips}{\def\eqe@drivernum{0}\def\eqDriverName{dvips}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{dvips}}
+\DeclareOptionX{pdftex}{\def\eqe@drivernum{1}\def\eqDriverName{pdftex}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{pdftex}}
+\DeclareOptionX{dvipdfm}{%
+    \def\eqe@drivernum{2}\def\eqDriverName{dvipdfm}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{dvipdfm}}
+\DeclareOptionX{dvipdfmx}{\def\eqe@drivernum{2}%
+    \def\eqDriverName{dvipdfmx}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{dvipdfmx}}
+\DeclareOptionX{xetex}{\def\eqe@drivernum{2}\def\eqDriverName{xetex}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{xetex}}
+\DeclareOptionX{textures}{%
+    \def\eqe@drivernum{3}\def\eqDriverName{textures}%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\eq@ColorPackage}{textures}}
+\DeclareOptionX*{%
+    \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{\eq@ColorPackage}}
+\def\eqe@drivernum{5}
+\let\eqDriverName\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \textsf{exerquiz} is not loaded, when we need to define some of the switches that
+% were defined in \textsf{exerquiz}.
+%
+% The following switches are used in the options above, and are also defined
+% in web, exerquiz, or eforms.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifeq@solutionsafter \eq@solutionsafterfalse
+\newif\ifsolutionsonly\solutionsonlyfalse
+\newif\ifeq@hidesolution \eq@hidesolutionfalse
+\newif\ifeq@globalshowsolutions \eq@globalshowsolutionsfalse
+\newif\ifeq@nosolutions \eq@nosolutionsfalse
+\newif\ifeq@proofing \eq@proofingfalse
+\newif\ifeq@nolink \eq@nolinkfalse
+\@ifundefined{ifpreview}{\newif\ifpreview \previewfalse}{}
+\newif\ifeqforpaper \eqforpaperfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We define the commands for inputting the CFG files.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+\@for\eqe@tmp@i:={},i,ii,iii,iv,v,vi\do{\eqe@csarg
+    \edef{eqemyconfig\eqe@tmp@i}{\noexpand
+    \InputIfFileExists{eqexam\eqe@tmp@i.cfg}{}{}}%
+    \eqe@tmp@exp
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \subsection{Bring in Config Files}
+%
+%    First read \texttt{web.cfg}, to possibly get the driver, then input
+%    \texttt{eqecus.opt}, which is used to create convenient custom options.
+%    \changes{v1.6e}{2006/05/07}{%
+%    Added a custom option feature. Just before the options are processed, the
+%    tex compiler looks for the file \texttt{eqecus.opt}. This file should
+%    contain one or more custom options. }
+%
+% Here is an example of usage for defining your own custom options, must be based on
+% current options, this code would be in the file \texttt{eqecus.opt}.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareOptionX{atbdbopts}
+%{%
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{online}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{forcolorpaper}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{nosolutions}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{nopoints}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{nototals}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{nospacetowork}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{obeylocalversions}
+%    \ExecuteOptionsX{myconfig}
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The following config files are input prior to \cs{ProcessOptionsX}, and can,
+% therefore, contain declaration of options. \texttt{web.cfg} usually only
+% specifies the default driver. \texttt{eqecus.opt} is used by \textsf{@EASE},
+% but can be used locally.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{web.cfg}{}{}
+\InputIfFileExists{eqecus.opt}{}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2010/03/05}
+%{
+% Added exambuilder.cfg for use by AeB Exam Builder, to pass the values of the options
+% max and rendition to eqexam.
+%}
+% These two are used by the \textsf{rendition} package and the exam builder utility.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{rendition.cfg}{}{}
+\InputIfFileExists{exambuilder.cfg}{}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Process Options}
+%
+% Now process the options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptionsX
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.2c}{2013/02/23}{Added \cs{selectedMC} at end of package}
+% The \cs{selectedMC} command contains the choice for the styling for the
+% region multiple choice questions: rectangles or circles. The default is
+% rectangles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfPackage{\selectedMC}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2015/07/12) Move the inclusion of the color package prior to loading many of the other
+% required packages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\eqe@tmpexp{\noexpand
+\RequirePackage{\eq@ColorPackage}}\eqe@tmpexp
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We require a minimal version for \textsf{xcolor}.
+%\changes{}{2015/07/21}{add \cs{let}\cs{CT@arc@}\cs{relax}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{xcolor}{\AtEndOfPackage{\let\CT@cell@color\relax
+    \let\CT@arc@\relax}%
+    \@ifpackagelater{xcolor}{2004/07/04}{}{\PackageError{eqexam}{%
+    *************************************************\MessageBreak
+    * Your Version of `xcolor.sty' is too old!\MessageBreak
+    * You need the version from 2004/07/04 or newer\MessageBreak
+    * or use: \string\usepackage[noxcolor]{eqexam}\MessageBreak
+    * or \string\documentclass[noxcolor]{article}\MessageBreak
+    *************************************************}{}%
+    }%
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \texttt{nocustomdesign} option is taken, we set the switch
+% \cmd{\eqcustomdesignfalse}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if\eqe@nocustomdesign1\eqcustomdesignfalse\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define a \cs{immediate}\cs{write} helper macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\eqe@IWO#1{\immediate\write#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \paragraph*{Early definitions for the \texttt{fortextbook} option.}
+%    \begin{macro}{\showAllAnsAtEnd}
+%    If the user has chosen the \texttt{vspacewithsolns} option, we must turn
+%    of all other solution options, namely \texttt{answerkey}. This command is
+%    used internally.
+%    \changes{v4.6b}{2016/10/02}{Include \string\cs{eqTopOfSolnPage} from \string\pkg{exerquiz}
+%    to support copying question to solution page.}
+%    \medskip\par\noindent
+%    (2016/10/02) Include \cs{eqTopOfSolnPage} from \pkg{exerquiz}
+%    to support copying question to solution page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\showAllAnsAtEnd}{%
+    \makeAnsEnvForSolnsAtEnd\eqTopOfSolnPage
+    \answerkeytrue\eq@proofingtrue
+    \eq@solutionsaftertrue\vspacewithsolnstrue
+    \displayworkareafalse\withsoldoctrue
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\makeAnsEnvForSolnsAtEnd}
+%    One user wanted to be able to use the \texttt{answers} environment
+%    in the solutions section at the end of the document (when the
+%    \texttt{vspacewithsolns} is used). Here it is. This definition
+%    is added to the definition of \cmd{\showAllAnsAtEnd}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makeAnsEnvForSolnsAtEnd}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.1e}{2012/11/10}{Removed hard-wired \cs{proofingsymbol}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%  \proofingsymbol{\ding{52}}%
+  \let\answers\answers@sq
+  \let\endanswers\endanswers@sq
+  \let\manswers\manswers@sq
+  \let\endmanswers\endmanswers@sq
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\solAtEndFormatting}[1]{\def\eqeAEFormatting{#1}}
+\let\eqeAEFormatting\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{writeAllAnsAtEnd} writes the \cs{showAllAnsAtEnd} command to the solutions file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\writeAllAnsAtEnd{\ifsolutionsonly\else
+    \let\quiz@solns\ex@solns
+    \eqe@IWO\quiz@solns{\string\showAllAnsAtEnd}%
+    \ifx\eqeAEFormatting\@empty\else
+        \eqe@IWO\quiz@solns{\string\eqeAEFormatting}\fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\setSolnMargins}
+%    Sets the value of \cs{eqemargin} in the context of the solution file,
+%    this command is redefined later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setSolnMargins}[1]{\setlength\eqemargin{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    (2011/05/08) In the new version of \textsf{eqexam}, the one that makes
+%    the problems within an \texttt{exam} environment, into a list, the
+%    solutions file that appears at the end of the document also needs to be
+%    put into a list. Here, we define the command that writes the beginning of
+%    the \texttt{eqequestions} environment to the beginning of the
+%    \cs{jobname.sol} file. We hard-wire write \verb!\setSolnMargins{\the\eqemargin}!
+%    to the solution file, but leave a back door open to write an alternate string.
+%    (2014/03/20) \DescribeMacro{\altSetSolnMargins}\cmd{\altSetSolnMargins} allows you,
+%    through its argument to pass an alternate string.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\altSetSolnMargins#1{\def\alt@SetSolnMargins{#1}}
+\let\alt@SetSolnMargins\@empty
+\def\writeBeginEqeQuestions{%
+    \ifsolutionsonly\else
+    \let\quiz@solns\ex@solns
+    \ifx\alt@SetSolnMargins\@empty
+        \writeToSolnFile{\string\setSolnMargins{\the\eqemargin}}\else
+        \writeToSolnFile{\alt@SetSolnMargins}\fi
+    \writeToSolnFile{\string\noindent\string\begin{eqequestions}}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2011/05/08) We define the command that writes the end of the \texttt{eqequestions}
+% environment to the beginning of the \cs{jobname.sol} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setBtwnExamSkip}[1]{\gdef\btwnExamSkipAmt{#1}%
+    \def\btwnExamSkip{\ifdim#1=0pt\else
+    \vskip#1\relax\fi}}
+\setBtwnExamSkip{6pt}
+\def\writeEndEqeQuestions{%
+    \ifsolutionsonly\else
+    \let\quiz@solns\ex@solns
+    \eqe@IWO\quiz@solns{\string\end{eqequestions}^^J}%
+    \writeToSolnFile{\string\btwnExamSkip^^J}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{ifvspacewithsolns} we set the switches need to simulate
+% \texttt{nosolutions}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifvspacewithsolns
+    \answerkeyfalse\eq@proofingfalse\eq@solutionsafterfalse
+    \eq@nolinkfalse\eq@nosolutionsfalse\displayworkareatrue
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Save Switch Values}
+%
+% Now, save the current state of the switches defined above. When, and if,
+% the packages web, \textsf{exerquiz} and \textsf{eforms} are loaded, they will overwrite the
+% choices set by the author, so we save them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\savedeq@online\eq@online
+\let\savedifeq@solutionsafter\ifeq@solutionsafter
+\let\savedifeq@hidesolution\ifeq@hidesolution
+\let\savedifeq@globalshowsolutions\ifeq@globalshowsolutions
+\let\savedifeq@nosolutions\ifeq@nosolutions
+\let\savedifeq@proofing\ifeq@proofing
+\let\savedifeq@nolink\ifeq@nolink
+\let\savedifpreview\ifpreview
+\let\savedifeqforpaper\ifeqforpaper
+\let\ifnosolutions\ifeq@nosolutions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Required Packages}
+% The following are the required packages for \textsf{eqexam}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{amstext,amssymb}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{if@fleqn}{\let\fleqnOn\relax\let\fleqnOff\relax}
+    {\def\fleqnOn{\@fleqntrue}\def\fleqnOff{\@fleqnfalse}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Bring the \texttt{comment} package in early, before \texttt{verbatim}, these two
+% clash a bit.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{comment}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The macro \cs{includeexersolutions} is defined in \textsf{eqexam.def}. We execute
+% the command \cs{include@solutions} before the web package is loaded. The \textsf{web} package
+% has a \cs{AtEndDocument} as well, and inserts a new page that we don't want.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{\includeexersolutions}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If user has specified one of the pdf options (pdf, links, online, email), we bring in
+% the web package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{web}{\let\load@web\eqe@YES}{%
+    \ifx\load@web\eqe@YES\ifnum\eqe@drivernum=5
+        \PackageInfo{eqexam}{You have not selected a driver %
+            for eqexam. Perhaps the \MessageBreak
+             driver is introduced through web.cfg%
+        }\fi\expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter[\eqe@webOpts]{web}%
+        \edef\@pdfcreator{\@pdfcreator, The eqexam Package}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If user has specified links, online or email, we bring in the exerquiz package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{exerquiz}{\let\load@exerquiz\eqe@YES}{%
+    \let\symbolchoice\@gobble
+    \ifx\load@exerquiz\eqe@YES\expandafter
+        \RequirePackage\expandafter[\eqe@eqOpts]{exerquiz}[2011/08/30]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We input \textsf{exerquiz} with the \texttt{nodljs}, we don't need all the JavaScript
+% to process interactive shortquizzes or quizzes, but we do want the option of
+% adding in document JavaScript, so after we input \textsf{exerquiz}, we set the
+% switches to allow these features.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \let\importdljs\eqe@YES\let\execjs\eqe@YES
+    \fi
+}
+\@ifpackageloaded{eforms}{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \textsf{eforms} is not loaded, we define \cs{symbolchoice}, which is
+% defined in \textsf{eforms} to gobble up its argument, we don't need it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\symbolchoice\@gobble
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here is a fix to a problem I've been having previewing in \textsf{dviwindo}.  I've traced
+% the problem down to \cs{@pdfviewparams}. Redefining \cs{@pdfviewparams} as follows.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqDvipsone{dvipsone}
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}
+    {\ifx\eqDriverName\eqDvipsone
+        \renewcommand\@pdfviewparams{ null null null}\fi
+    }{\let\textorpdfstring\@firstoftwo}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now that we have possibly input \textsf{web} or \textsf{exerquiz}, we need to restore the authors options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eq@online\savedeq@online
+\let\ifeq@solutionsafter\savedifeq@solutionsafter
+\def\ifsolutionsafter{\ifeq@solutionsafter} % user interface
+\let\ifeq@hidesolution\savedifeq@hidesolution
+\let\ifeq@globalshowsolutions\savedifeq@globalshowsolutions
+\let\ifeq@nosolutions\savedifeq@nosolutions
+\let\ifeq@proofing\savedifeq@proofing
+\let\ifeq@nolink\savedifeq@nolink
+\let\ifpreview\savedifpreview
+\let\ifeqforpaper\savedifeqforpaper
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Other packages of interest.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{calc}
+\RequirePackage{pifont}
+\RequirePackage{array}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here, I input the \texttt{verbatim} package after the comment package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{verbatim}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% When constructing paper tests, I often use a multi-column format for some of
+% the questions, so let's require this package
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+\setlength\columnseprule{.4pt}
+\raggedcolumns\multicolsep=3pt
+\newcommand{\setmulticolprob}{%
+    \setlength{\linewidth}{\linewidth+\eqemargin}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For the \texttt{fortextbook} option, we require \textsf{eso-pic}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\eqe@reqPack{\ifeqfortextbook\noexpand\RequirePackage{eso-pic}\else
+\relax\fi}
+\eqe@reqPack
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We've processed the options, I need to detect whether the document author
+% has not chosen any solutions options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ifsolutionsAtEnd}
+    {\newif\ifsolutionsAtEnd\solutionsAtEndtrue}{}
+\ifvspacewithsolns\solutionsAtEndtrue\fi
+\ifanswerkey\solutionsAtEndfalse\fi
+\ifeq@nosolutions\solutionsAtEndfalse\fi
+\ifeq@solutionsafter\solutionsAtEndfalse\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Page Layout}
+% (2011/05/08) The revised version of \texttt{eqexam} allows the document author
+% to more easily design the size of the page; the new version makes all content
+% inside the \texttt{exam} environment into a list, this gives us better control over the
+% margins and spacing.
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqexammargin}
+% (2011/05/08) Use this command to set the margin for the \texttt{exam} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{eqemargin}{\newlength{\eqemargin}}{}
+\providecommand{\prbDecPt}[1]{\def\eqe@decPointPrb{#1}}
+\def\eqe@decPointPrb{.}\def\eqe@dpsepPrb{\ }
+\providecommand{\prbPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{#1}}
+\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{\ }
+\providecommand{\prbNumPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@hspannerPrb{#1}}
+\def\eqe@hspannerPrb{\ }
+\newcommand{\eqexammargin}[2][\normalsize\normalfont\bfseries]{%
+    \settowidth{\eqemargin}{#1#2\eqe@decPointPrb\eqe@hspannerPrb}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2011/05/08) The default margin for the \textsf{eqexam} environment, two digits and a space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\eqexammargin{00}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v3.0s}{2012/01/01}{%
+% Moved a copy of \cs{eqe@spannerSoln} out of the \texttt{ftbsty} to the \texttt{package} section,
+% its needed here as well.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@hspannerSoln{\ }   % space after prob number
+\providecommand{\solNumPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@hspannerSoln{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqeSetExamPageParams}
+% (2011/05/08) The default spacing maximizes the amount of space on the page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqeSetExamPageParams}{%
+    \setlength{\headheight}{12pt}
+    \setlength{\topmargin}{-.5in}
+    \setlength{\headsep}{20pt}
+    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0pt}
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{0pt}
+    \setlength{\marginparsep}{11pt}
+    \setlength{\marginparwidth}{35pt}
+    \setlength{\footskip}{11pt}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqExamPageLayout}
+% Set the basic parameters of this exam page package
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqExamPageLayout}{%
+    \setlength\textwidth\paperwidth
+    \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2in}
+    \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\oddsidemargin}
+    \setlength\textheight{\paperheight}
+    \addtolength\textheight{-2in}
+    \addtolength\textheight{-\headheight}
+    \addtolength\textheight{-\headsep}
+    \addtolength\textheight{-\topmargin}
+    \addtolength\textheight{-\footskip}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2011/05/08) If \texttt{usecustomdesign} is used it is expected that
+% \cs{eqe\-Set\-Exam\-Page\-Params} and \cs{eqeSetExamPageParams} are redefined in he preamble,
+% otherwise, we set up the standard parameters; otherwise
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifeqcustomdesign\else
+\eqeSetExamPageParams
+\eqExamPageLayout
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% A simple page layout scheme for this exam.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ps@eqExamheadings}
+{%
+    \renewcommand{\@oddhead}{%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\ifnum\value{page}<2
+        \hfil\else\eqExamRunHead\fi}}%
+    \renewcommand{\@evenhead}{\@oddhead}
+    \renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\settotalsbox\runExamFooter}
+    \renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@oddfoot}
+}
+\raggedbottom
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Counters, Lengths and Tokens}
+% Some counters to keep track of things. \DescribeEnv{eqpointsofar}
+% \DescribeEnv{eqpointsthispage} The first two counters keep track, respectively,
+% of the total points so far up the current page, and the number of points
+% on the current page. \DescribeEnv{eq@numparts} The counter \texttt{eq@numparts}
+% holds the number of parts of the multi-part question.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{eqpointsofar}
+\newcounter{eqpointsthispage}
+\newcounter{eq@numparts}
+\newcounter{eq@count}
+\newtoks\partNames \partNames={}
+\newlength{\eq@tmplengthA}
+\newbox{\eq@pointbox}
+\newlength{\eq@pointboxtotalheight}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Some scratch registers to do calc calculations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+\newlength{\eqetmplengthb}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Some Macros to Support the Options}
+% We make a few definitions to support various options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PointsOnLeft{\def\@reportpoints{1}\let\marginpoints\eqleftmargin}
+\def\PointsOnRight{\def\@reportpoints{2}\relax
+    \let\marginpoints\eqrightmarginbox}
+\def\PointsOnBothSides{\def\@reportpoints{3}\relax
+    \let\marginpoints\eqbothmargins}
+\newif\ifeqe@nopoints \eqe@nopointsfalse
+\def\NoPoints{\if\isInExamEnv\eqe@NO
+    \eqe@nopointstrue\def\@reporttotals{0}\let\totalsbox=\hfil
+    \let\marginpoints\@empty\let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES\else
+    \PackageWarning{eqexam}{The \string\NoPoints\space ignored;
+    it needs to be executed\MessageBreak outside of an
+    exam environment}\fi}
+\def\TotalsOnLeft{\def\@reporttotals{1}\def\totalsbox{\totalsboxleft}}
+\def\TotalsOnRight{\def\@reporttotals{2}\def\totalsbox{\totalsboxright}}
+\def\noZeroTotals{\let\eqe@zeroTotalsAllowed\eqe@NO}
+\def\allowZeroTotals{\let\eqe@zeroTotalsAllowed\eqe@YES}
+\allowZeroTotals
+\def\NoTotals{\def\@reporttotals{0}\let\totalsbox=\hfil}
+\def\SummaryTotalsOn{\let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@NO}
+\def\SummaryTotalsOff{\let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES}
+\def\eoeTotalOff{\let\eq@parttotals\eqe@NO}
+\def\eoeTotalOn{\let\eq@parttotals\eqe@YES}
+\def\separationruleOn{\let\eqx@separationrule\eqe@YES}
+\def\separationruleOff{\let\eqx@separationrule\eqe@NO}
+\def\AllowFitItIn{\global\let\eq@fititin\eqfititin}
+\def\DoNotFitItIn{\global\let\eq@fititin\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v3.0p}{2011/09/22}{Added \cs{NoSolutions} to be executed in
+%preamble, needed with the fortextbook package.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NoSolutions{\eq@nolinktrue\eq@nosolutionstrue
+    \displayworkareatrue}
+\@onlypreamble\NoSolutions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\vspacewithkeyOn}
+%    \begin{macro}{\vspacewithkeyOff}
+%\changes{v2.0k}{2011/04/29}{Added user interface to the switch
+%\cs{ifkeepdeclaredvspacing}, which is defined in \texttt{eqexam.def}/\textsf{exerquiz}.}
+% User interface to keeping the declare vspace, even when
+% the \texttt{answerkey} (or \texttt{solutionsafter}) option is taken. The switch
+% \cs{ifkeepdeclaredvspacing} is defined in \texttt{eqexam.def}/\textsf{exerquiz}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\vspacewithkeyOn{\keepdeclaredvspacingtrue}
+\def\vspacewithkeyOff{\keepdeclaredvspacingfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%\DescribeMacro{\displayPointsOn}\cmd{\displayPointsOn} displays the points, if not otherwise
+% overridden and the command \DescribeMacro{\displayPointsOff}\cmd{\displayPointsOff} turns off the
+% display of points. In either case, points are calculated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifdispl@yPoints\displ@yPointstrue
+\newcommand{\displayPointsOn}{\displ@yPointstrue}
+\newcommand{\displayPointsOff}{\displ@yPointsfalse}
+\newif\ifl@stDispl@yPoints\l@stDispl@yPointsfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\encloseProblemsWith}
+%\changes{v1.7b}{2007/21/07}
+%{%
+% Added \cs{encloseProblemsWith} to support the \texttt{solutionsonly} option
+%}
+% \cs{encloseProblemsWith} to support the \texttt{solutionsonly} option
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\encloseProblemsWith#1{%
+    \ifsolutionsonly\excludecomment{#1}\else
+    \includecomment{#1}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \section{Colors}
+%    \begin{macro}{\proofingsymbolColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\instructionsColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqCommentsColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\universityColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\titleColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\authorColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\subjectColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\linkcolor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\nolinkcolor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillinColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\forceNoColor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqEndExamTotalColor}
+%    Here we list commands for controlling colors. There are some other
+%    colors defined in the stand alone code.
+%    \changes{v1.6e}{2006/05/07}
+%    {
+%    Added easy user access to various colors, \cs{proofing\-symbol\-Color},
+%    \cs{instructionsColor}, \cs{eqCommentsColor}, \cs{authorColor},
+%    \cs{title\-Color}, \cs{universityColor} and \cs{subjectColor}
+%    }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\proofingsymbolColor}[1]{\def\@proofingsymbolColor{#1}}
+\proofingsymbolColor{red}
+\providecommand{\instructionsColor}[1]{\def\@instructionsColor{#1}}
+\instructionsColor{blue}
+\providecommand{\eqCommentsColor}[1]{\def\@eqCommentsColor{#1}}
+\eqCommentsColor{blue}
+\providecommand{\eqCommentsColorBody}[1]{\def\@eqCommentsColorBody{#1}}
+\eqCommentsColorBody{black}
+\providecommand{\universityColor}[1]{\def\webuniversity@color{#1}}
+\universityColor{blue}
+\providecommand{\titleColor}[1]{\def\webtitle@color{#1}}
+\titleColor{black}
+\providecommand{\authorColor}[1]{\def\webauthor@color{#1}}
+\authorColor{black}
+\providecommand{\subjectColor}[1]{\def\websubject@color{#1}}
+\subjectColor{blue}
+\providecommand{\linkcolor}[1]{\def\@linkcolor{#1}}
+\linkcolor{blue}
+\providecommand{\nolinkcolor}[1]{\def\@nolinkcolor{#1}}
+\nolinkcolor{black}
+\providecommand{\eqEndExamTotalColor}[1]{\def\endexamtotal@color{#1}}
+\eqEndExamTotalColor{black}
+\newcommand\fillinColor[1]{\def\eq@fillinColor{#1}}\fillinColor{red}
+\providecommand{\sectionColor}[1]{\def\web@sectionsColorOld{#1}
+    \def\aeb@sectioncolor{#1}}
+\sectionColor{blue}
+\newcommand{\forceNoColor}{%
+    \proofingsymbolColor{black}\instructionsColor{black}
+    \eqCommentsColor{black}\universityColor{black}
+    \titleColor{black}\authorColor{black}
+    \subjectColor{black}\linkcolor{black}
+    \nolinkcolor{black}\fillinColor{black}
+    \eqEndExamTotalColor{black}
+    \if\load@web\eqe@YES\sectionColor{black}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \section{Version Control}
+% Here are some simple macros use to create two versions,
+% version A and version B, of the same test.
+%    \begin{macro}{\examNum}
+% Convenience macro for holding the exam number. It sets the
+% value of \cs{nExam}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\examNum#1{\def\nExam{#1}}
+\examNum{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\Exam}
+%    \begin{macro}{\sExam}
+% Convenience macros for titling the exam. Usage:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\VersionAtext{Test~\nExam--Version A}
+%\VersionBtext{Test~\nExam--Version B}
+%\shortVersionAtext{T\nExam A}
+%\shortVersionBtext{T\nExam B}
+%
+%\examNum{1}
+%\forVersion{c}
+%\subject[C3]{Calculus III}
+%\title[\sExam]{\Exam}
+%\author{Dr.\ D. P. Story}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% These next two definitions are overwritten by the two
+% commands \cs{longTitleText} and \cs{shortTitleText}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Exam{\ifAB{\eq@VersionAtext}{\eq@VersionBtext}}
+\def\sExam{\ifAB{\eq@shortVersionAtext}{\eq@shortVersionBtext}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\VersionAtext}
+%    \begin{macro}{\VersionBtext}
+%    \begin{macro}{\shortVersionAtext}
+%    \begin{macro}{\shortVersionBtext}
+% Convenience macros for entering the text for the title, long and short
+% for versions A and B.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\VersionAtext#1{\def\eq@VersionAtext{#1}}
+\def\VersionBtext#1{\def\eq@VersionBtext{#1}}
+\def\shortVersionAtext#1{\def\eq@shortVersionAtext{#1}}
+\def\shortVersionBtext#1{\def\eq@shortVersionBtext{#1}}
+\VersionAtext{Exam~\nExam--Version A}
+\VersionBtext{Exam~\nExam--Version B}
+\shortVersionAtext{Exam~\nExam A}
+\shortVersionBtext{Exam~\nExam B}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% In this section we introduce a new set of commands that supersedes
+% the commands defined above. Those commands were limited to only
+% two versions. The ones below can handle up to $26$ versions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\eqtemptokena
+\newtoks\eqtemptokenb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\numVersions}
+% In the preamble, declare the number of versions for this document
+% using \cs{numVersions}, e.g., |\numVersions{3}|. This sets the value
+% of \cs{eq@nVersions}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numVersions#1{\ifnum#1>26\def\eq@nVersions{26}%
+    \PackageWarning{eqexam}{The value of \string\numVersions\space is
+    too large. \MessageBreak Choose a natural number less than 27}
+    \else\def\eq@nVersions{#1}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\longTitleText}
+%    \begin{macro}{\endlongTitleText}
+%    \begin{macro}{\shortTitleText}
+%    \begin{macro}{\endshortTitleText}
+% Next we state the long and short titles for our document,
+% one for each of our declare number of versions given earlier.
+% For example, we can use the value \cs{nExam} in out titles. Usage:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%    \longTitleText
+%        {Test~\nExam--Version A}
+%        {Test~\nExam--Version B}
+%        {Test~\nExam--Make Up}
+%    \endlongTitleText
+%    \shortTitleText
+%        {T\nExam A}
+%        {T\nExam B}
+%        {T\nExam MU}
+%    \endshortTitleText
+%\end{verbatim}
+% I've added markers that delimit the end of the arguments. In this
+% way, the end of the list of titles can be detected, even though
+% the number of titles is not the same as what is declared by the
+% \cs{numVersions}.
+%
+% If there are more titles than what is declared, the rest are absorbed (gobbled).
+% If there are fewer titles than declared, a {\LaTeX} package error is generated,
+% and substitute titles are generated.
+% \changes{v1.9f}{2009/10/06}
+% {
+%    Modified \cs{longTitleText}, \cs{shortTitleText} to have an optional
+%    argument (A--Z;a--z). You can select a particular title from a list
+%    of titles. If no optional argument is passed, then the title determined
+%    by \cs{forVersion} is used.
+% }
+% Modified \cs{longTitleText} and \cs{shortTitleText} to have an optional
+% argument (A--Z;a--z). You can select a particular title from a list
+% of titles. If no optional argument is passed, then the title determined
+% by \cs{forVersion} is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\longTitleText}[1][]{%
+    \ifeqglobalversion\let\eq@selectedVersion@save\eq@selectedVersion
+    \else\let\eq@selectedVersion@save\relax\fi
+    \uppercase{\def\eqe@localTextTitle{#1}}%
+    \ifx\eqe@localTextTitle\@empty\else
+    \expandafter\forVersion\expandafter{\eqe@localTextTitle}\fi
+    \eqe@contTitleText{\Exam}{\endlongTitleText}%
+}
+\def\endlongTitleText{l}
+\newcommand{\shortTitleText}[1][]{%
+    \ifeqglobalversion\let\eq@selectedVersion@save\eq@selectedVersion
+    \else\let\eq@selectedVersion@save\relax\fi
+    \uppercase{\def\eqe@localTextTitle{#1}}%
+    \ifx\eqe@localTextTitle\@empty\else
+    \expandafter\forVersion\expandafter{\eqe@localTextTitle}\fi
+    \eqe@contTitleText{\sExam}{\endshortTitleText}%
+}
+\def\endshortTitleText{s}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Both title commands, above, call this macro which sets the environment
+% for \cs{@gatherTitleText}, which gathers the list of titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@contTitleText#1#2{%
+    \setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+    \eqtemptokena={}\let\endtitleMarker#2
+    \@gatherTitleText{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% This command gathers each title and places it as the argument of a
+% \cs{v<LETTTER>} command. These are accumulated in token registers
+% then saved in \cs{Exam} and \cs{sExam}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gatherTitleText#1#2{%
+    \def\eqe@argii{#2}
+    \if\endtitleMarker\eqe@argii
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Encountered the end marker. See if we have collected the
+% correct number of titles declared. If we have collected too
+% few, we note an warning in the log, and create titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifnum\value{eq@count}>\eq@nVersions\let\eqe@next\relax
+        \else\def\eqe@next{\eq@shortTitlesFix{#1}}\fi
+    \else
+    \stepcounter{eq@count}
+        \eqtemptokenb=\expandafter{#2}
+        \xdef#1{\the\eqtemptokena\expandafter\noexpand
+        \csname v\Alph{eq@count}\endcsname{\the\eqtemptokenb}}
+        \xdef\sExam{\the\eqtemptokena\expandafter\noexpand
+        \csname v\Alph{eq@count}\endcsname{\the\eqtemptokenb}}
+        \eqtemptokena=\expandafter{#1}
+        \ifnum\value{eq@count}<\eq@nVersions
+            \def\eqe@next{\@gatherTitleText{#1}}%
+        \else
+            \def\eqe@next{%
+                \if\endtitleMarker\endlongTitleText
+                    \expandafter\eqe@absorbTokensLong
+                \else
+                    \expandafter\eqe@absorbTokensShort
+                \fi
+            }%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \eqe@next
+}
+\long\def\eqe@absorbTokensLong#1\endlongTitleText{%
+    \protected@xdef\Exam{\Exam}\ifx\eq@selectedVersion@save\relax
+    \eqe@offVersion\else\expandafter\forVersion\expandafter
+    {\eq@selectedVersion@save}\fi}
+\long\def\eqe@absorbTokensShort#1\endshortTitleText{%
+    \protected@xdef\sExam{\sExam}\ifx\eq@selectedVersion@save\relax
+    \eqe@offVersion\else\expandafter\forVersion\expandafter
+    {\eq@selectedVersion@save}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have reached \cs{endtitleMarker}, but the count is still less than \cs{eq@nVersions},
+%  so we'll warn the user, and create titles for user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eq@shortTitlesFix#1{%
+    \PackageWarning{eqexam}{You have defined an insufficient number
+    of titles\MessageBreak for the number of versions declared in
+    \string\numVersions.\MessageBreak Please fix the problem}%
+    \stepcounter{eq@count}%
+    \if\endtitleMarker\endlongTitleText
+        \edef\eqe@tmp{\noexpand\@gatherTitleText{\noexpand#1}
+            {??---Title \# \the\value{eq@count}---??}%
+            \noexpand\endlongTitleText}
+    \else
+        \edef\eqe@tmp{\noexpand\@gatherTitleText{\noexpand#1}
+            {T\#\the\value{eq@count}??}\noexpand\endshortTitleText}
+    \fi
+    \addtocounter{eq@count}{-1}%
+    \eqe@tmp
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here, we define \cs{ifAB} so that document under the old system
+% still work properly, I hope. Usage of \cs{ifAB} at this point
+% is discouraged.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ifAB#1#2{\if\eq@selectedVersion A#1%
+    \else\if\eq@selectedVersion B#2\fi\fi}
+\def\eq@replaceToken#1{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\forVersion}
+% Here is the command that does all the work. It creates alternate
+% text macros for each of the versions declared using \cs{numVersions}.
+%
+% For example, assuming |\numVersions{3}| appeared earlier, the
+% command |\forVersion{a}| (or |\forVersion{A}|) defines $3$ text commands \cs{vA}, \cs{vB} and
+% \cs{vC}, each taking one argument, the text you want to display:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% Name the \vA{place}\vB{date}\vC{year} of the signing of the Declaration
+% of independence.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Since we said |forVersion{a}| only the \cs{vA} text
+% is displayed, the others are gobbled up, etc. But wait, the \cs{forVersion}
+% does more than that! It also creates a series of comment environments
+% |\begin{verA}/\end{verA}|, |\begin{verB}/\end{verB}|, |\begin{verC}/\end{verC}|, etc.,
+% where only the version for which this compile applies will be typeset,
+% the others are commented out.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\numVersions{3}
+%\forVersion{b}
+%...
+%\begin{document}
+%...
+% Solve the equation for $\vA{x}\vB{y}\vC{z}$:
+%\[
+%\begin{verA}
+%       2x + 4 = 7
+%\end{verA}
+%\begin{verB}
+%       5y + 2 = 4
+%\end{verB}
+%\begin{verC}
+%       3z - 2 = 2
+%\end{verC}
+%\]
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \changes{1.6b}{2006/04/03}
+% {
+%   Changed the alphabet environments \texttt{A}, \texttt{B}, etc.\ due to a
+%   conflict with \cs{S}, the control sequence for the \textsf{amsmath} package
+%   for a section: \cs{S} expands to \S.  Names changed to \texttt{verA}, \texttt{verB}, etc.
+% }
+% \changes{v1.6f}{2006/10/24}
+% {
+%   Fixed a bug in the \cs{eqe@initializeMultiVersions} command, made sure that any
+%   already defined comment environments are set to relax.
+% }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifeqglobalversion \eqglobalversionfalse
+\newif\ifeqlocalversion \eqlocalversionfalse
+\newif\if@templocalversion \@templocalversionfalse
+\def\eqe@initializeMultiVersions{%
+    \let\save@message\message\let\message\@gobble
+    \@tfor\eqe@tmp:=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\do{%
+        \expandafter\let\csname v\eqe@tmp\endcsname\@gobble
+        \expandafter\excludecomment\expandafter{ver\eqe@tmp}%
+        \expandafter\let\csname Afterver\eqe@tmp Comment\endcsname\relax
+    }\let\message\save@message
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{\let\eqe@initializeMultiVersions\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (09/10/04) Trying to fix a bug in the case when the version selected is greater
+% then the number of versions available for a given problem; that is, when modular
+% arithmetic occurs (in \cs{selectVersion}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eqe@@onVersion\@empty
+\def\eqe@onVersion{\g@addto@macro\eqe@@onVersion}
+\let\eqe@@offVersion\@empty
+\def\eqe@offVersion{\g@addto@macro\eqe@@offVersion}
+\let\eqe@@holdTemp\@empty
+\def\eqe@holdTemp{\g@addto@macro\eqe@@holdTemp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Two commands to turn on and off versions (the \cs{v<LETTER>} and the \texttt{ver<LETTER>}
+% environment).
+%
+% Throughout the definitions below, we use \cs{csarg}, a command that is defined in the
+% \textsf{comment} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@showArg#1{#1}
+\def\eqe@turnOnComment#1{%
+%    \csarg\let{v#1}\@empty
+    \csarg\let{v#1}\eqe@showArg
+    \edef\exp@temp{\noexpand\includecomment{ver#1}}\exp@temp
+}
+\def\eqe@turnOffComment#1{%
+    \csarg\let{v#1}\@gobble
+    \edef\exp@temp{\noexpand\excludecomment{ver#1}}\exp@temp
+    \csarg\let{Afterver#1Comment}\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, the \cs{forVersion} command. \DescribeMacro{\selVersion}\cmd{\selVersion}
+% holds the version selected in upper-case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\forVersion#1%
+{%
+    \eqe@initializeMultiVersions
+    \let\eqe@@onVersion\@empty
+    \let\eqe@@offVersion\@empty
+    \global\eqglobalversiontrue
+    \setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+    \uppercase{\edef\eq@selectedVersion{#1}}%
+    \edef\selVersion{\eq@selectedVersion}%
+    \@ifundefined{eq@nVersions}{\PackageInfo{eqexam}{%
+        \string\numVersions\space has not been declared, \MessageBreak
+        taking the number of versions to be 2.}\def\eq@nVersions{2}}{}%
+    \loop
+        \stepcounter{eq@count}%
+        \expandafter\if\Alph{eq@count}\eq@selectedVersion
+            \xdef\eq@nSelectedVersion{\the\value{eq@count}}%
+            \setcounter{eq@count}{27}\fi
+        \ifnum\value{eq@count}<26\repeat
+        \ifnum\eq@nSelectedVersion >\eq@nVersions
+            \PackageError{eqexam}
+            {The value of \string\forVersion
+             \space(\eq@selectedVersion)\MessageBreak
+             exceeds the value of \string\numVersions\space
+             (\eq@nVersions)}%
+            {Decrease the value of \string\forVersion.}%
+        \fi
+    \setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+    \let\save@message\message\let\message\@gobble
+    \loop
+        \stepcounter{eq@count}%
+        \csarg\let{After\Alph{eq@count}Comment}\relax
+        \lowercase
+        {%
+            \if#1\alph{eq@count}%
+                \eqe@turnOnComment{\Alph{eq@count}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (09/10/04) Save the commands for turning  on the version with
+% \cs{eqe@onVersion}, and for turning it off with
+% \cs{eqe@offVeresion}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \edef\temp@exp{\noexpand
+                    \eqe@turnOnComment{\Alph{eq@count}}}%
+                \expandafter\eqe@onVersion\expandafter{\temp@exp}%
+                \edef\temp@exp{\noexpand
+                    \eqe@turnOffComment{\Alph{eq@count}}}%
+                \expandafter\eqe@offVersion\expandafter{\temp@exp}%
+            \else
+                \eqe@turnOffComment{\Alph{eq@count}}%
+            \fi
+        }%
+        \ifnum\value{eq@count}<\eq@nVersions\repeat
+        \let\message\save@message
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Let us assume version A initially, user with reset this in document.
+%\changes{1.6c}{2006/05/02}
+%{%
+% At the end of the package, set the initial value of \cs{select\-Version} to
+%    \string\verb!*+\string\selectVersion{26}+ and set the initial value
+% of \cs{forVersion} to \string\verb!*+\string\forVersion{A}+.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfPackage{\numVersions{26}\forVersion{A}%
+    \eq@renditionOptions}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\selectVersion}
+% When an exam has questions in which the number of variations are not all the same,
+% then you can locally change the version between problems.
+% If the first argument is empty, the first variation is chosen.
+% The syntax is
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\selectVersion{2}{3}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This command says that the next problem has 3 variations, and here we select the second one.
+%\changes{1.6a}{2006/01/22}
+% {%
+%   added \cs{selectVersion} command, also the command was fixed \cs{forVersion} so that it can be changed
+%   within the document, added switches to control new selection.
+% }
+%\changes{v3.7}{2015/02/11}{Worked on the logic}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\selectVersion#1#2{% #1 \le #2
+    \xdef\nLocalSelection{#1}\xdef\nLocalVersions{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If obey local version is in effect and the local selection is not empty,
+% no modular arithmetic is needed in the first loop below
+% of \cs{nLocalSelection}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\needsModArith\eqe@YES
+    \ifeqobeylocalversion\ifx\nLocalSelection\@empty\else
+    \let\needsModArith\eqe@NO\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% When the solutions appear at the end of the document, the version may not match
+% the version for the question. We need to use a private hook defined in
+% \textsf{exerquiz} (and \texttt{eqexam.def}) to reproduce the same settings going into
+% each solution at the end. So, we write the \cs{selectVersion} to the solution
+% file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\exer@solnheadhook{%
+        \string\selectVersion{#1}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Turn off messaging.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\save@message\message\let\message\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Reset the selected version, the one selected in the preamble. A previous problem
+% may have changed the version due to modular arithmetic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \eqe@@onVersion
+    \ifx\eqe@@holdTemp\@empty\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{eqe@holdTemp} is non-empty, this means that modular
+% arithmetic was performed on the previous problem. We need to turn
+% on the original choice, and turn off the temporary choice, then
+% clear the command \cs{eqe@@holdTemp}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \eqe@@onVersion\eqe@@holdTemp
+        \let\eqe@@holdTemp\@empty
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{eqglobalversion} is \texttt{true}, then a \cs{forVersion}
+% has been executed. If the number of versions declared by
+% \cs{numVersions} is greater than the number of local versions for
+% this problem, then we perform modular arithmetic to get an
+% appropriate alternative. It may be necessarily to temporarily put
+% \cs{eqobeylocalversion} to true to accomplish, but we use change it
+% back at the end.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\needsModArith\eqe@YES
+    \ifeqglobalversion\ifnum\eq@nSelectedVersion>\nLocalVersions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we perform modular arithmetic, turn off original choice.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \eqe@@offVersion
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now perform mod arithmetic
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        {\count0=\eq@nSelectedVersion \count2=\count0
+         \advance\count0by-1 \divide\count0by\nLocalVersions
+         \multiply\count0by\nLocalVersions %\count2=\eq@nSelectedVersion
+         \advance\count2by-\count0
+         \xdef\nLocalSelection{\the\count2 }%
+         \ifeqobeylocalversion\else
+            \global\@templocalversiontrue
+            \global\eqobeylocalversiontrue\fi}%
+         \global\let\eqe@@holdTemp\@empty
+    \fi\fi
+\fi
+    \ifeqobeylocalversion
+        \global\eqlocalversiontrue
+        \setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If local selection is empty, use the version requested by \cs{forVersion},
+% modular arithmetic may have to be performed.
+% arithmetic to resolve the matter
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\nLocalSelection\@empty
+            \def\nLocalSelection{\eq@nSelectedVersion}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If local selection exceeds number of local versions, use modular
+% arithmetic to resolve the matter
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifnum\nLocalSelection>\nLocalVersions
+            {\count0=\nLocalSelection
+            \count2=\count0
+             \advance\count0by-1 \divide\count0by\nLocalVersions
+             \multiply\count0by\nLocalVersions
+             \advance\count2by-\count0
+             \xdef\nLocalSelection{\the\count2 }}%
+        \fi
+        \let\save@message\message\let\message\@gobble
+        \loop
+            \stepcounter{eq@count}%
+            \csarg\let{Afterver\Alph{eq@count}Comment}\relax
+            \lowercase
+            {%
+                \ifnum\value{eq@count}=\nLocalSelection
+                   \eqe@turnOnComment{\Alph{eq@count}}%
+                    \edef\temp@exp{\noexpand
+                        \eqe@turnOffComment{\Alph{eq@count}}}%
+                    \expandafter\eqe@holdTemp\expandafter{\temp@exp}%
+                \else
+                    \eqe@turnOffComment{\Alph{eq@count}}%
+                \fi
+            }%
+            \ifnum\value{eq@count}<\nLocalVersions\repeat
+            \let\message\save@message
+    \fi
+    \if@templocalversion\global\eqobeylocalversionfalse\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% added 09/10/03 reset back to default
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@templocalversionfalse
+    \let\message\save@message
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \section{Title Definitions from Web}
+%    \begin{macro}{\title}
+%    \begin{macro}{\subject}
+%    \begin{macro}{\author}
+%    \begin{macro}{\email}
+%    \begin{macro}{\keywords}
+%    \begin{macro}{\university}
+% Make Title Definitions taken from the \texttt{Web} package. This is
+% to maintain compatibility with \texttt{Web}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{web}{}{%
+    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{\let\texorpdfstring\@firstoftwo}%
+    \let\web@save@title\title
+    \def\title{\@ifnextchar[{\@web@title}{\@web@title[]}}
+    \def\@web@title[#1]#2{\gdef\webtitle{#2}%
+        \@ifundefined{hypersetup}{}{\hypersetup{pdftitle={#2}}}%
+        \def\webArg{#1}\ifx\webArg\@empty\gdef\shortwebtitle{#2}\else
+        \gdef\shortwebtitle{#1}\fi\web@save@title{#2}}
+    \let\web@saved@author\author
+    \def\author#1{\gdef\webauthor{#1}%
+        \@ifundefined{hypersetup}{}{\hypersetup{pdfauthor={#1}}}%
+        \web@saved@author{#1}}
+    \def\subject{\@ifnextchar[{\@subject}{\@subject[]}}
+    \def\@subject[#1]#2{\def\webArg{#1}%
+        \ifx\webArg\@empty\gdef\shortwebsubject{#2}\else
+        \gdef\shortwebsubject{#1}\fi\gdef\websubject{#2}%
+        \@ifundefined{hypersetup}{}{\hypersetup{pdfsubject={#2}}}}
+    \def\email#1{\gdef\webemail{#1}}
+    \def\keywords#1{\gdef\webkeywords{#1}%
+        \@ifundefined{hypersetup}{}{\hypersetup{pdfkeywords={#1}}}}
+    \def\university#1{\gdef\webuniversity{#1}}
+    \def\copyrightyears#1{\gdef\webcopyrightyears{#1}}
+    \def\version#1{\gdef\web@version@value{#1}%
+        \edef\webversion{\ifx\web@version@value\@empty\else
+            \noexpand\web@versionlabel\noexpand\
+            \noexpand\web@version@value\fi}%
+    }
+    \let\web@version@value\@empty
+    \def\versionLabel#1{\def\web@versionlabel{#1}}
+    \versionLabel{Version}
+    \def\web@toc{Table of Contents}
+    \def\web@continued{cont.}
+% set  some defaults
+    \title{}\author{}\email{}\subject{}\keywords{}\university{}
+    \providecommand{\optionalPageMatter}[2][]{%
+        \def\optionalpagematter{#2}}
+    \def\optionalpagematter{}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\date}
+% {\LaTeX} (\TeX) defines a \cs{date} command that is also used by \textsf{eqexam}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\duedate#1{\def\theduedate{#1}}
+\duedate{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\duedate}
+% In addition to these, we also define a \cs{duedate} macro, may be useful for
+% writing assignments with a due date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\duedate#1{\def\theduedate{#1}}
+\duedate{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\thisterm}
+% The command \cs{thisterm} can be used in the \cs{date} field to indicate the term
+% of this test, for example, \verb!\date{\thisterm, \the\year}!  This command may
+% be redefined to conform to your own academic terms.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\thisterm{%
+% if prior to June (Jan--May)
+    \ifnum\month<6Spring\else
+% if prior to August (June-July)
+        \ifnum\month<8Summer\else
+% August or later; if Sept--Dec
+            \ifnum\month>8Fall\else
+% Month of August; if after 25th
+                \ifnum\day>25Fall\else
+% if it's 25th or earlier in month of August
+                    Summer\fi\fi\fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \section{Identification Information}
+% We define a series of commands in support of building an exam: Lines to identify
+% the student and his/her student id (SID), the instructors email address, the name of the
+% test and the course.
+%\par\medskip
+%\noindent\DescribeMacro{\eqExamName}\DescribeMacro{\examNameLabel} provides a line for the student to enter his/her name into the
+% exam. The command \cs{examNameLabel} can be used to define the name label, the default
+% is \texttt{Name:}
+%
+% Will insert a text box as well if the \texttt{option} is taken in addition
+% to \texttt{nosolutions} and with \texttt{solutionsafter} not taken.
+% This macro defines \cs{eq@ExamName}, which actually contains the code.
+% The first (optional) parameter is passed to \cs{insTxtFieldIdInfo}, and can be
+% used to change the appearance of the text field created; the second required parameter
+% is the width of the field.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\examAnsKeyLabel}[1]{%
+    \def\@examAnsKeyLabel{\ifanswerkey\space #1\fi}}
+\examAnsKeyLabel{Answer Key}
+\newcommand\examNameLabel[1]{\gdef\@examNameLabel{#1\@examAnsKeyLabel}}
+\examNameLabel{Name:}
+\newcommand{\idinfoHighlight}[1]{\def\eqe@idinfohl{#1}}
+\idinfoHighlight{\underbar}
+\newcommand\eqExamName[2][]{%
+    \def\eqExamName@argi{#1}\def\eqExamName@argii{#2}}
+\def\eq@ExamName{\bgroup
+    \settowidth\eq@tmplengthA{\@examNameLabel\ }%
+    \@tempdima=\eqExamName@argii\relax
+    \advance\@tempdima by-\eq@tmplengthA
+    \eqe@idinfohl{\makebox[\eqExamName@argii][l]{\@examNameLabel}}%
+    \expandafter\insTxtFieldIdInfo\expandafter[\eqExamName@argi]%
+        {\@tempdima}{IdInfo.Name}\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here we set the field to be a required field with width of $2.25$ inches
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\eqExamName[\Ff\FfRequired]{2.25in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\eqSID} provides a line for the student to enter his/her ID number (SID).
+%
+%  Will insert a text box as well if the \texttt{option} is taken in addition
+% to \texttt{nosolutions} and with \texttt{solutionsafter} not taken.
+% The first (optional) parameter is passed to \cs{insTxtFieldIdInfo}, and can be
+% used to change the appearance of the text field created; the second required parameter
+% is the width of the field.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\examSIDLabel[1]{\gdef\@examSIDLabel{#1}}
+\examSIDLabel{SID:}
+\newcommand\eqSID[2][]{\def\eqSID@argi{#1}\def\eqSID@argii{#2}}
+\def\eq@SID{\bgroup\settowidth\eq@tmplengthA{\@examSIDLabel\ }%
+    \@tempdima=\eqSID@argii\relax\advance\@tempdima by-\eq@tmplengthA
+    \eqe@idinfohl{\makebox[\eqSID@argii][l]{\@examSIDLabel}}%
+    \expandafter\insTxtFieldIdInfo\expandafter[\eqSID@argi]%
+        {\@tempdima}{IdInfo.SID}\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here we set the field to be a required field with width of $2.25$ inches
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\eqSID[\Ff\FfRequired]{2.25in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\eqEmail} provides a line for the student
+% to enter his/her email address. Useful for documents submitted by email, the
+% instructor can reply.
+%
+%  Will insert a text box as well if the \texttt{option} is taken in addition
+% to \texttt{nosolutions} and with \texttt{solutionsafter} not taken.
+% The first (optional) parameter is passed to \cs{insTxtFieldIdInfo}, and can be
+% used to change the appearance of the text field created; the second required parameter
+% is the width of the field.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\examEmailLabel[1]{\gdef\@examEmailLabel{#1}}
+\examEmailLabel{Email:}
+\newcommand\eqEmail[2][]{%
+    \def\eqExam@argi{#1}\def\eqEmail@argii{#2}}
+\gdef\eq@Email{\bgroup\settowidth\eq@tmplengthA{\@examEmailLabel\ }%
+    \@tempdima=\eqEmail@argii\relax\advance\@tempdima by-\eq@tmplengthA
+    \underbar{\makebox[\eqEmail@argii][l]{\@examEmailLabel}}%
+    \expandafter\insTxtFieldIdInfo\expandafter[\eqEmail@argi]%
+        {\@tempdima}{IdInfo.email}\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here we set the field to be a field with width of $2.25$ inches. (Not set to be a required field.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\eqEmail{2.25in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\insTxtFieldIdInfo} The above macros (\cs{eqExamName}, \cs{eqSID} and \cs{eqEmail})
+% all call this macro, which inserts a Acroforms text field if the \texttt{option} is taken in addition
+% to \texttt{nosolutions} and with \texttt{solutionsafter} not taken.
+%
+% The first (optional) parameter is used to change the appearance of the text field.
+% The second parameter is the width of the field, and the third is the field name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\insTxtFieldIdInfo[#1]#2#3{%
+    \@ifundefined{@quiz}{}{\if\eq@online\eqe@YES
+        \ifeq@nosolutions\ifeq@solutionsafter\else
+            \raisebox{-1bp}{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+                \textField[\BC{}#1]{#3}{#2}{11bp}}}%
+        \fi\fi\fi
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\SubmitInfo} is required when the \texttt{email} option is taken,
+% and should appear in the preamble. The first argument is the URL to the \textsf{eqAttach.asp}
+% code on the server, and the second is the email of the instructor is to receive the results.
+% (Multiple recipients can be specified by separating each with a comma.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SubmitInfo#1#2{%
+    \def\EqExam@SubmitURL{#1}\def\@EmailInstr{#2}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\EmailCourseName} is used to specify the course name of the course. The default
+% value for this is \cs{websubject}, obtained from the \cs{subject} macro used in the preamble; however,
+% if you want a different name in the email, perhaps with more information included, you can redefine
+% the value using this macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\EmailCourseName#1{\def\@EmailCourseName{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here's the default value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\EmailCourseName{\websubject}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\EmailExamName} is used to specify the exam name of the course. The default
+% value for this is \cs{webtitle}, obtained from the \cs{title} macro used in the preamble; however,
+% if you want a different name in the email, perhaps with more information included, you can redefine
+% the value using this macro.
+% (Multiple recipients can be specified by separating each with a comma.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\EmailExamName#1{\def\@EmailExamName{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here's the default value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\EmailExamName{\webtitle}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\EmailSubject} The document author mail want a custom subject in the email, instead
+% of the standard one. By using this macro, he can design his own email subject.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\EmailSubject#1{\def\@EmailSubject{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here's the default value, which generates no custom subject line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\EmailSubject{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In this case \textsf{eqAttach.asp} inserts the standard one.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%Exam Results: \webtitle of \websubject
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The email would read like ``\texttt{Exam Results:~Test 1 of Calculus I}'', for example.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ServerRetnMsg} Unless submitted in \texttt{silent} mode, the \textsf{eqAttach.asp}
+% returns a message acknowledging the receipt of the data. \cs{ServerRetnMsg} is used to customize
+% this message.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ServerRetnMsg#1{\def\@ServerRetnMsg{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here's the default value, which generates no custom return message
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ServerRetnMsg{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \noindent\DescribeMacro{\SubmitButtonLabel} is the label that appears on the submit button.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SubmitButtonLabel#1{\def\@SubmitButtonLabel{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here's the default value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SubmitButtonLabel{Submit}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\SubmitButton} is the macro that provides the submit button
+% when the \texttt{email} option is taken. It appears automatically at the top of
+% the first page of the exam, and appears only if \texttt{nosolutions} has has been
+% taken, and \texttt{solutionsafter} has  not been taken.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\priorSubmitJS\@gobble
+\let\postSubmitJS\@empty
+\def\SubmitButton
+{%
+    \ifx\use@email\eqe@YES\ifeq@nosolutions\ifeq@solutionsafter\else
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\pushButton
+            [\CA{\@SubmitButtonLabel}\A{\JS{%
+                var _eqEok2Submit = true;\r
+                var aSubmitFields = new Array("eqexam", "IdInfo");\r
+                \priorSubmitJS\r
+                if(_eqEok2Submit) this.submitForm("\EqExam@SubmitURL",
+                    true, false, aSubmitFields);\r
+                \postSubmitJS
+                }}]{Submit}{1.5in}{16bp}}%
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\F\FHidden\DV{\@EmailInstr}
+            \V{\@EmailInstr}]{IdInfo.mailTo}{11bp}{11bp}}%
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\F\FHidden\DV{\@EmailCourseName}
+            \V{\@EmailCourseName}]{IdInfo.courseName}{11bp}{11bp}}%
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\F\FHidden\DV{\@EmailExamName}
+            \V{\@EmailExamName}]{IdInfo.examName}{11bp}{11bp}}%
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\F\FHidden\DV{\@EmailSubject}
+            \V{\@EmailSubject}]{IdInfo.subject}{11bp}{11bp}}%
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\F\FHidden\DV{\@ServerRetnMsg}
+            \V{\@ServerRetnMsg}]{IdInfo.retnmsg}{11bp}{11bp}}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thequizno{\if\probstar*\Alph{quizno}\else\alph{quizno}\fi}
+\def\linkContentFormat{%
+    \if\probstar*\Alph{quizno}\else\alph{quizno}\fi}
+\def\linkContentWrapper{(\hfil\linkContentFormat\hfil)}%
+\def\Ans@r@l@Defaults
+{%
+    \BC{}\S{S}\W{1}\Ff{\FfNoToggleToOff}
+    \textSize{12}\textColor{0 g}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2014/03/12) Added \verb!\eq@hspanner\ignorespaces!, in the next two commands. Fixes
+% problems with spacing following the choice box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\optsRadioBtnf}[1]{\def\eqe@optsRadiof{#1}}
+\newcommand{\optsRadioBtnl}[1]{\def\eqe@optsRadiol{#1}}
+\let\eqe@optsRadiof\@empty\let\eqe@optsRadiol\@empty
+\def\eqExam@Ans@sq@l{\leavevmode
+    \if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}\else\ifwithsoldoc
+    \stepcounter{quizno}\else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\fi
+    \PBS\raggedright\settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@l}%
+    \sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\eq@l@l}\eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox
+    \def\link@@Content{\linkContentWrapper}%
+    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
+    \edef\fieldName{%
+        \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.part\thepartno%
+        \else
+            eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi%
+        \fi
+    }%
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@YES\relax
+    \makebox[0pt][l]{%
+        \radio@@Button{\presets{\eqe@optsRadiol}}{\fieldName}%
+        {\eq@tmpdima}{\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}%
+        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@l@check@driver}%
+        {\Ans@r@l@Defaults\every@RadioButton\every@qRadioButton}}%
+    \else
+        \edef\@linkcolor{\@nolinkcolor}%
+    \fi
+    \ifeq@nosolutions\edef\@linkcolor{\@nolinkcolor}\fi
+    \textcolor{\@linkcolor}{\makebox[\eq@tmpdima]{\link@@Content}}%
+    \Ans@proofing{\eq@tmpdima}%
+    \eq@hspanner\ignorespaces
+}
+\def\eqExam@Ans@sq@f{\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}\else
+    \ifwithsoldoc\stepcounter{quizno}\else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\fi
+    \PBS\raggedright\settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@f}%
+    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox%
+    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@NO\previewtrue
+        \insertGrayLetters
+        \Ans@sq@f@driver
+    \else
+        \ifanswerkey\previewtrue
+            \Ans@sq@f@driver
+        \else
+%            \ifallowcircmc
+%                \ifx\Bbox\eqe@BboxCirc\symbolchoice{circle}\fi\fi
+            \edef\fieldName{%
+                \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.%
+                    part\thepartno%
+                \else
+                    eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi%
+                \fi
+            }\insertGrayLetters
+            \radio@@Button{\presets{\eqe@optsRadiof}}%
+            {\fieldName}{\RadioFieldSize}%
+            {\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}{\eq@protect\A}%
+            {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
+            {\@@Ans@sq@f@Defaults\Ans@sq@f@Actions\every@RadioButton
+            \every@sqRadioButton\insert@circlesymbol}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
+    \eq@hspanner\ignorespaces
+}
+\newcommand{\optsCkBxf}[1]{\def\eqe@optscbf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\optsCkBxl}[1]{\def\eqe@optscbl{#1}}
+\let\eqe@optscbl\@empty\let\eqe@optscbf\@empty
+\def\eqExam@Ans@ck@sq@l{\leavevmode
+    \if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}\else
+    \ifwithsoldoc\stepcounter{quizno}\else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\fi
+    \PBS\raggedright\settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@l}%
+    \sbox{\eq@tmpbox}{\eq@l@l}\eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox
+    \def\link@@Content{\linkContentWrapper}%
+    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
+    \edef\fieldName{%
+        \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.%
+            part\thepartno.\alph{quizno}%
+        \else
+            eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.\alph{quizno}%
+        \fi
+    }%
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@YES\relax
+    \makebox[0pt][l]{\check@@Box{\presets{\eqe@optscbl}}{\fieldName}%
+        {\eq@tmpdima}{\RadioFieldSize}{\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}%
+        {\eq@protect\A}{\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@l@check@driver}%
+        {\Ans@r@l@Defaults\every@RadioButton\every@qRadioButton}}%
+    \else
+        \edef\@linkcolor{\@nolinkcolor}%
+    \fi
+    \ifeq@nosolutions\def\@linkcolor{\@nolinkcolor}\fi
+    \textcolor{\@linkcolor}{\makebox[\eq@tmpdima]{\link@@Content}}%
+    \Ans@proofing{\eq@tmpdima}%
+    \eq@hspanner\ignorespaces
+}
+\def\eqExam@Ans@ck@sq@f{\if\eq@listType1\stepcounter{quizno}\else
+    \ifwithsoldoc\stepcounter{quizno}\else\refstepcounter{quizno}\fi\fi
+    \PBS\raggedright\settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\eq@lw@f}%
+    \eq@tmpdima=\wd\eq@tmpbox%
+    \hangindent=\eq@tmplength\hangafter=1\relax
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@NO\previewtrue
+        \insertGrayLetters
+        \Ans@sq@f@driver
+    \else
+        \ifanswerkey\previewtrue
+            \Ans@sq@f@driver
+        \else
+            \edef\fieldName{%
+                \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.%
+                    part\thepartno.\alph{quizno}%
+                \else
+                    eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.\alph{quizno}%
+                \fi
+            }\insertGrayLetters
+            \mbox{\check@@Box{\presets{\eqe@optscbf}}{\fieldName}%
+                {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}%
+                {\Ans@choice\alph{quizno}}{\eq@protect\A}%
+                {\eq@setWidgetProps\eq@RadioCheck@driver}%
+                {\@@Ans@sq@f@Defaults\Ans@sq@f@Actions\every@RadioButton
+                \every@sqRadioButton}}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
+    \eq@hspanner\ignorespaces
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\optsMlTextField} is used to pass options to the multiline
+% text field.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\optsMlTextField#1{\def\eqe@optsmltf{#1}}
+\let\eqe@optsmltf\@empty
+\def\eqExamPriorVspace#1{%
+    \edef\fieldName{%
+        \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.%
+            \theeqquestionnoi.part\thepartno.solution%
+        \else
+            eqexam.\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi.solution%
+        \fi
+    }%
+    \nobreak\noindent\textField[\BC{}\presets{\eqe@optsmltf}
+        \Ff\FfMultiline]{\fieldName}{\linewidth}{#1}\@gobble
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Test to see if \texttt{exerquiz} is loaded. If not, we input
+% the `stand alone', \texttt{eqalone.def}, followed by \texttt{eqexam.def}. The latter
+% definition file is maintained in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} under the \texttt{eqexam} option.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{exerquiz}{%
+    \let\Ans@sq@l\eqExam@Ans@sq@l
+    \let\Ans@sq@f\eqExam@Ans@sq@f
+    \let\Ans@ck@sq@l\eqExam@Ans@ck@sq@l
+    \let\Ans@ck@sq@f\eqExam@Ans@ck@sq@f
+    \def\eqexheader@wrapper{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+        \hypertarget{qex.\the@exno}{\eqexheader}}}%
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@YES\relax
+        \newcounter{@cntfillin}%
+        \let\eqPriorVspace\eqExamPriorVspace
+    \fi
+}%
+{%
+    \input{eqalone.def}
+    \input{eqexam.def}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \changes{v4.9}{2017/03/16}{Updated \string\pkg{eqexam} to reflect changes in \string\texttt{eqexam.def}.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifl@ter{def}{eqexam}{\eqexamdefReq}{}
+    {\PackageWarningNoLine{eqexam}
+    {This version of eqexam requires eqexam.def\MessageBreak
+    dated \eqexamdefReq\space or later}}
+    \def\eqexheader@wrapper{\makebox[0pt][r]{\eqexheader}}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We wrote \verb!\begin{eqequestions}! to the top of the solutions file (\cs{jobname.sol}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\writeBeginEqeQuestions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \texttt{vspacewithsolns} is in effect, we write solutions to the end of the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+    \ifvspacewithsolns\writeAllAnsAtEnd\else
+    \ifeqfortextbook\writeAllAnsAtEnd\fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We execute \cs{vspacewithkeyOff}, which sets \cs{ifkeepdeclaredvspacing} to false,
+% the default behavior of \textsf{eqexam} before the new feature.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\vspacewithkeyOff
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Stand alone Code}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*standalone>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we begin the listing of the stand alone code. This code is necessary if
+% \textsf{exerquiz} has not been loaded, which is the case if there is no \textsf{PDF} options
+% or if the \texttt{pdf} option is taken.
+%
+% Many of the following definitions are given in \texttt{eforms}, which was recently separated
+% from \texttt{exerquiz} and is now maintained as a separate package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesFile{eqalone.def}
+ [2012/25/01 v3.0t Minimal code used by eqexam (dps)]
+\@ifundefined{eq@tmpbox}{\newsavebox{\eq@tmpbox}}{}% defined in eforms
+\@ifundefined{eq@tmpdima}{\newdimen\eq@tmpdima}{}  % defined in eforms
+\def\RadioFieldSize{11bp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\eqcenterWidget
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This macro is used to vertically center the response box on the line. Seems to
+% work well.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\centerWidget
+#1{%
+    \eqcenterWidget=#1
+    \eqcenterWidget=.5\eqcenterWidget
+    \advance\eqcenterWidget by-4bp
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\eqe@Bbox}When the \texttt{preview} option has been used, draw a frame box
+% around the bounding rectangle.
+% \changes{}{2015/06/04}{Added \cs{previewColor}}
+% \DescribeMacro\previewColor\cmd{\previewColor} adds some color to the preview (bounding boxes). The
+% default is \texttt{black}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\previewColor{black}
+\def\eqe@BboxRect#1#2{\hbox{\color{\previewColor}\vbox{\hrule width #1
+    \hbox to#1{\vrule height#2\hfill\vrule height#2}\vfill\hrule}}}
+\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxRect}
+\def\selectedMC{\useRectForMC}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\Rect} is used internally to color a link.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Rect#1{\textcolor{\@linkcolor}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The auxiliary file \texttt{eqexam.def}, created by \textsf{exerquiz}, writes
+% \DescribeMacro{\ReturnTo}\cs{ReturnTo} to the \textsf{SOL} file
+% in the form \verb!\ReturnTo{page.1}{\mbox{}}!. We want to remove the
+% \cs{mbox} because it causes, at times, more vertical space that is wanted
+% in an exam document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@striphbox\mbox#1{#1}
+\newcommand{\ReturnTo}[2]{\eq@fititin{\eqe@striphbox#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\section{Switching proofing symbols}
+% \DescribeMacro{\proofingsymbol} The definition of the proofing symbol, this
+% symbol marks the correct answer of a multiple choice question when the
+% \texttt{proofing} option is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\proofingsymbol}[1]{%
+    \def\@proofingsymbol{\textcolor{\@proofingsymbolColor}{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This is the answers macro for the link-style and is called from the \texttt{eqexam.def} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</standalone>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In response to the \texttt{allowcircmc}, we load \texttt{lcircle10} and use the `h' and `x'
+% glyph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\selectedMC{\useRectForMC}
+\ifallowcircmc
+    \font\eqe@lcir=lcircle10 at 12pt
+    \bgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Get the width of the `h', the circle has zero height and depth. Set the
+% diameter and radius of the circle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \setbox0=\hbox{\eqe@lcir h}
+        \xdef\eqe@cirDiam{\the\wd0}
+        \@tempdima=.5\wd0
+        \xdef\eqe@cirRadius{\the\@tempdima}
+    \egroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A command to use the circle (h) and the filled circle (x).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\circ@Glyph#1#2{\hbox{\smash{\raisebox{\eqe@cirRadius}%
+        {\makebox[\eqe@cirDiam]{\llap{\rlap{\eqe@lcir#1}%
+        \hskip#2\relax}}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Added preview color to the circle version of the bounding box. The color
+% accessed through \cs{previewColor}, its default is \texttt{black}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\eqe@BboxCirc#1#2{\hbox{%
+        \textcolor{\previewColor}{\circ@Glyph{h}{0pt}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For proofing purposes, prepare the filled circle in the form of the command
+% \cs{circProofingForCirc}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\circProofingForCirc{\centerWidget\RadioFieldSize
+        \lower\eqcenterWidget\circ@Glyph{x}{1.4pt}}
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@YES
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If online (\texttt{online} or \texttt{email} option), we cancel these commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \def\useCircForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxCirc\useMCCircles}
+        \def\selectedMC{\useCircForMC}
+        \@ifundefined{eqe@BboxRect}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\ef@Bbox\useMCRects}}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxRect\useMCRects}}
+%        \let\useRectForMC\relax
+    \else % if not online
+        \@ifundefined{eqe@BboxRect}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\ef@Bbox}}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxRect}}
+        \def\useCircForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxCirc}
+        \def\selectedMC{\useCircForMC}
+    \fi
+    \def\useCircForProof{\symbolchoice{circle}%
+        \proofingsymbol{\circProofingForCirc}}
+\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \texttt{allowcircmc} is not taken
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if\eq@online\eqe@YES
+        \def\useCircForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxCirc\useMCCircles}
+        \@ifundefined{eqe@BboxRect}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\ef@Bbox\useMCRects}}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxRect\useMCRects}}
+    \else
+        \@ifundefined{eqe@BboxRect}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\ef@Bbox}}
+            {\def\useRectForMC{\let\Bbox\eqe@BboxRect}}
+        \def\useCircForMC{\useRectForMC}
+        \def\selectedMC{\useRectForMC}
+    \fi
+    \let\useCircForProof\relax
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\useRectForMS}\cmd{\useRectForMS} When declared, rectangles are
+% used for multiple selection, similarly, \DescribeMacro{\useCircForMS}\cmd{\useCircForMS}
+% uses circles if \texttt{allowcirc4mc} is in effect.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifuserectforms
+\def\useRectForMS{\userectformstrue}
+\def\useCircForMS{\userectformsfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.1e}{2012/11/10}{Changed default for \cs{proofingsymbol}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\useCheckForProof}{\symbolchoice{check}%
+    \proofingsymbol{\ding{52}}}
+\useCheckForProof
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly, for a cross,  we get a nice `handwritten' cross \verb!\ding{56}!, !when we latex
+% the document; for the \texttt{online} or \texttt{email} option, we get a simple cross in the
+% active radio button field.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\useCrossForProof}{\symbolchoice{cross}%
+    \proofingsymbol{\raisebox{-1pt}{\rlap{\kern-1pt\Large\ding{56}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The Main Code}
+% We now continue with the main package. Mostly, we define macros specific to the
+% \texttt{eqexam} package: define the \texttt{problem} and \texttt{problem*} environments,
+% macros for calculating totals per page, etc.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MCcolor{black}
+\def\Ans@sq@l@driver{\edef\@linkcolor{\MCcolor}%
+    \Rect{\makebox[\eq@tmpdima]{\linkContentWrapper}}%
+    \Ans@proofing{\eq@tmpdima}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This is the answers macro for the form-style and is called from the \texttt{eqexam.def} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Ans@sq@f@driver{%
+    \centerWidget\RadioFieldSize
+    \leavevmode\lower\eqcenterWidget\Bbox %\eqe@Bbox
+        {\RadioFieldSize}{\RadioFieldSize}%
+    \Ans@proofing{\RadioFieldSize}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Write quiz solutions to the exercise solutions file
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eq@sqsllabel{\string\textbf{Solution to Quiz:}}
+\def\sqsllabel{\eq@sqsllabel}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\writeToSolnFile}
+% General purpose command for writing to the solution file.
+%    \begin{macro}{\preExamSolnHead}
+% Executed just before a user friendly name
+%    \begin{macro}{\examSolnHeadFmt}
+% Format for the user friendly name
+%    \begin{macro}{\postExamSolnHead}
+% Executed just after a user friendly name
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\quiz@solns\ex@solns
+\newcommand{\preExamSolnHead}{\goodbreak\noindent}
+\newcommand{\examSolnHeadFmt}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\postExamSolnHead}{\par\medskip}
+\newcommand{\writeToSolnFile}[1]{%
+    \let\quiz@solns\ex@solns
+    \set@display@protect
+    \eqe@IWO\quiz@solns{#1}%
+    \set@typeset@protect
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We will write all solutions to the \texttt{.sol} auxiliary file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@writetoSolns#1{%
+    \set@display@protect
+    \eqe@IWO\quiz@solns{\string\preExamSolnHead
+        \string\examSolnHeadFmt{#1}\string\postExamSolnHead}%
+    \set@typeset@protect
+}
+\def\eqe@writetoAux#1{%
+    \set@display@protect
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{#1}%
+    \set@typeset@protect
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% Turn off interactivity of short quiz.
+\def\Ans@sq@l@Actions{}
+\def\Ans@sq@f@Actions{}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This macro is defined in \texttt{exerquiz}, but has a little different definition for \textsf{eqexam}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Ans@proofing
+#1{%
+    \ifeq@proofing\if\Ans@choice1\relax
+        \llap{\rlap{\,\@proofingsymbol}\hskip#1\relax}%
+    \fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This macro gets the page number of the last page of the exam. It is read in through
+% a macro definition made and written to the \texttt{.aux} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eq@ExamLastPage{\csname eqExamLastPage\endcsname}
+\newcommand{\nPagesOnExam}{\csname eqExamLastPage\endcsname}
+\newcommand{\nPagesOfQues}{\ifvspacewithsolns
+    \csname eqExamQuesLastPage\endcsname\else
+    \csname eqExamLastPage\endcsname\fi}
+\newcommand{\nPagesOfSols}{\def\eqExamNumPagesSolns{0}%
+    \csarg\ifx{eqExamLastPage}\relax\else
+    \csarg\ifx{eqExamLastPage}\relax\else
+    {\count\z@=\nPagesOnExam\relax\advance
+     \count\z@-\nPagesOfQues\relax
+     \xdef\eqExamNumPagesSolns{\the\count\z@}}\fi\fi
+     \eqExamNumPagesSolns
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\lastPageOfExam}
+%\changes{v2.0l}{2011/05/05}{%
+% Returns the page number of the end of the exam with a given name.
+%}
+% Returns the page number of the end of the exam with a name of \texttt{\#1}.
+%    \begin{macro}{\firstPageOfExam}
+%\changes{v2.0l}{2011/05/05}{%
+% Returns the page number of the beginning of the exam with a given name.
+%}
+% Returns the page number of the beginning of the exam with a name of \texttt{\#1}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\lastPageOfExam}[1]{\pageref{#1PageEnd}}
+\newcommand{\firstPageOfExam}[1]{\pageref{#1PageBegin}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    The last two commands are meant to produce typeset numbers; however, there
+%    is a need to convert these to numbers that tex's registers can manipulate.
+%    Here goes. \DescribeMacro{\eqe@defNumRefii}\cmd{\eqe@defNumRefii} takes
+%    its argument and strips away the other arguments of \cs{pageref}; it picks
+%    off the second of two or five, depending if \textsf{hyperref} is loaded.
+%    It defines a macro |\csname nRefii@#1\endcsname| whose value is a page
+%    number of the referenced object.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqe@defNumRefii}[1]{%
+    \@ifundefined{hyperref}{\let\@getsecondOf\@secondoftwo}
+    {\let\@getsecondOf\@secondoffive}%
+    \@ifundefined{r@#1}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the reference \texttt{r@\#1} is undefined, define the value to be 0
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \csarg\gdef{nRefii@#1}{0}}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the reference \texttt{r@\#1} is defined, define the value to be
+%    the second argument of \cs{r@\#1} expanded
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname nRefii@#1\endcsname
+        {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+    \@getsecondOf\csname r@#1\endcsname}%
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \DescribeMacro{\eqe@numRefii} takes one argument, the control
+%    name. Its value is zero or \cs{nRefii@\#1}. This expands to a number
+%    in all cases. It can be used in tex comparisons.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@numRefii#1{%
+    \csarg\ifx{nRefii@#1}\relax 0\else
+    \@nameuse{nRefii@#1}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\numLastPageOfExam}
+%    \begin{macro}{\numFirstPageOfExam}
+%    This is the user-interface to acquiring the first and last page
+%    numbers of the exam with name \texttt{\#1}. These can be used
+%    in comparisons, e.g.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%   \rfooteqe{\ifnum\value{page}<\numLastPageOfExam{<myTest>}%
+%       \textbf{Test Continues}\fi}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\numLastPageOfExam}[1]{\eqe@numRefii{#1PageEnd}}
+\newcommand{\numFirstPageOfExam}[1]{\eqe@numRefii{#1PageBegin}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makeRefsNums}{%
+    \@ifundefined{thePartNames}{}{\begingroup
+        \def\\##1{\typeout{processing ##1}%
+            \eqe@defNumRefii
+            {##1PageEnd}\eqe@defNumRefii{##1PageBegin}}%
+        \thePartNames
+    \endgroup}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\makeRefsNums}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Running Heads and Feet}
+% We develop a series of macros for creating running headers and footers for the exam.
+%    \begin{macro}{\lheadeqe}
+%    \begin{macro}{\cheadeqe}
+%    \begin{macro}{\rheadeqe}
+%\changes{2.0a}{2010/05/06}{
+% Changed the definitions of \cs{lhead}, \cs{chead}, and \cs{rhead} so they don't clash
+% with the \textsf{fancyhdr} package. If \textsf{fancyhdr} is not loaded at the time \textsf{eqexam} is loaded, we
+% \cs{let} the old names to the new names. Therefore, when \textsf{fancyhdr} is loaded first use
+% the new definitions.
+%}
+% Set the left, center, and right running headers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\lheadeqe}[1]{\def\eq@lhead{#1}}
+\lheadeqe{\shortwebsubject/\shortwebtitle}
+\newcommand{\cheadeqe}[1]{\def\eq@chead{#1}}
+\cheadeqe{-- Page \arabic{page} of {\nPagesOnExam} --}
+\newcommand{\rheadeqe}[1]{\def\eq@rhead{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The default is \cs{eq@ExamName}, which is defined by \cs{eqExamName}, the default displays the word \texttt{"Name"}
+%    and an underlined horizontal space for the student to enter his/her name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\rheadeqe{\eq@ExamName}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\lhead}
+%    \begin{macro}{\chead}
+%    \begin{macro}{\rhead}
+% These are the original names for the headers, we'll keep them if
+% \textsf{fancyhdr} is not already loaded to maintain compatibility
+% with previous versions of \textsf{eqexam}. The use of these commands
+% is \emph{discouraged}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{fancyhdr}{}{%
+    \let\lhead\lheadeqe
+    \let\chead\cheadeqe
+    \let\rhead\rheadeqe
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\runExamHeader}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqExamRunHead}
+% The running header of the exam, may be redefined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\runExamHeader}{\eq@lhead\hfill\eq@chead\hfill\eq@rhead}
+\newcommand\eqExamRunHead{%
+    \addtolength\textwidth{\oddsidemargin}%
+    \noindent\hspace*{-\oddsidemargin}\makebox[\textwidth]
+    {\runExamHeader}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \paragraph*{Running footers.}
+%    One or two users wanted to use running footers, so
+%    here they are.
+%    \begin{macro}{\lfooteqe}
+%    \begin{macro}{\cfooteqe}
+%    \begin{macro}{\rfooteqe}
+%    There has been some demand for running footers. You  have to be
+%    a little careful, \textsf{eqexam} uses the footer for the
+%    command \cmd{\settotalsbox}, which puts in the totals for the pages
+%    either on the left (\texttt{totalsonleft}) or right (\texttt{totalsonright}) side, depending on the option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\lfooteqe}[1]{\def\eq@lfoot{#1}}
+\lfooteqe{}
+\newcommand{\cfooteqe}[1]{\def\eq@cfoot{#1}}
+\cfooteqe{}
+\newcommand{\rfooteqe}[1]{\def\eq@rfoot{#1}}
+\rfooteqe{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \DescribeMacro{\runExamFooter}Considering the defaults for the left, center, and right footer elements,
+%    the default footer contributes nothing, except inserting
+%    \cmd{\settotalsbox} (see the definition of \cs{@oddfoot})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\runExamFooter}{\eq@lfoot\hfill\eq@cfoot\hfill\eq@rfoot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \paragraph*{Running headers for solutions.}
+%    We provide a special set of headers for the solution pages.
+%    The document author needs to manage running footers for the solution
+%    pages.
+%    \begin{macro}{\lheadSol}
+%    \begin{macro}{\cheadSol}
+%    \begin{macro}{\rheadSol}
+%    \begin{macro}{\runExamHeaderSol}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqsolutionshook}
+% The running header of the exam, when solutions are included at the end of
+% the document, perhaps for posting the solutions to the exam, or
+% publication of a ``pretest''. Note that \cs{eqsolutionshook} is defined
+% in \texttt{exerquiz/eqexam.def}. May be redefined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\lheadSol}[1]{\def\eq@lheadSol{#1}}
+\lheadSol{\shortwebsubject/\shortwebtitle}
+\newcommand{\cheadSol}[1]{\def\eq@cheadSol{#1}}
+\cheadSol{-- Page \arabic{page} of {\eq@ExamLastPage} --}
+\newcommand{\rheadSol}[1]{\def\eq@rheadSol{#1}}
+\rheadSol{SOLUTIONS}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cs{runExamHeaderSol} distributes the three solution headers across
+%    the page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\runExamHeaderSol}
+    {\eq@lheadSol\hfill\eq@cheadSol\hfill\eq@rheadSol}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The solutions headers are inserted using the \cs{eq@solutionshook}, see
+%    the definition of \cmd{\exerSolnInput}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eq@solutionshook
+{%
+    \gdef\eqExamRunHead{\addtolength\textwidth{\oddsidemargin}%
+    \noindent\hspace*{-\oddsidemargin}\makebox[\textwidth]
+    {\runExamHeaderSol}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{maketitle}}{\textbackslash{maketitle}} definitions}
+%    \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+%    \begin{macro}{\maketitledesign}
+%    \begin{macro}{\altTitle}
+% Standard {\LaTeX} macro, but this time it is used to create the header at the top of the first
+% page of the exam. Typically, consisting of two rows of info. (1) first row has course name, exam name, and
+% a place for the student to put his/her name. (2) second row has date and instructor. May be redefined.
+%
+% Modify the title by redefining \cs{maketitledesign}, the \cs{maketitle} command
+% itself has {\LaTeX} commands in it that should not be changed.
+% \changes{v1.6i}{2007/09/18}
+%{
+% Added the command \cs{altTitle} as an alternate title for the exam
+% document.  This alternate title appear centered under the title
+% of the document.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\maketitledesign
+{%
+    \makebox[\textwidth]{\normalsize
+        \shortstack[l]{\strut\websubject\\\@date}\hfill
+        \shortstack[c]{\webtitle\\\strut\@altTitle}\hfill
+        \shortstack[l]{\strut\eq@ExamName\\\webauthor}}%
+}
+\def\altTitle#1{\def\@altTitle{#1}}
+\let\@altTitle\@empty
+\def\eqemaketitle
+{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{EQEcalculateAllTotals}: We don't actually calculate all totals, just
+% some of them. We do calculate the grade total of all the \texttt{exam}
+% environments in the document, we also calculate the percentage that each
+% exam contributes to to the total. If \cs{maketitle} is not used, for
+% whatever reason, this command should be calculated explicitly just after
+% |\begin{document}|.
+% \changes{v3.0y}{2012/04/20}{Moved \cs{EQEcalculateAllTotals} from the bottom
+% to the top of \cs{eqemaketitle}. In case the author wants the grand total
+% of the exam in the title, we need to make all calculations before
+% \cs{maketitledesign.}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \EQEcalculateAllTotals
+    \begingroup
+%    \addtolength\textwidth{\oddsidemargin}%
+    \noindent%\hspace*{-\oddsidemargin}%
+    \raisebox{.7in}[0pt][0pt]{\SubmitButton}%
+    \maketitledesign
+    \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \texttt{fortextbook} option is not taken, we set up the usual \cs{maketitle} definition.
+% If the \texttt{useclassmaketitle} option is taken, we don't redefine either.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifeqfortextbook
+    \@ifpackageloaded{web}{\let\maketitle\web@save@maketitle}{}%
+\else
+    \if@eqeuseclassmaketitle
+        \@ifpackageloaded{web}{\let\maketitle\web@save@maketitle}{}%
+    \else
+        \let\maketitle\eqemaketitle
+    \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \subsection{The cover page definitions}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqexcoverpage}
+% The \texttt{eqexam} package allows for the possibility of a cover page, if the \texttt{coverpage}
+% option is taken.
+%    \begin{macro}{\placeCoverPageLogo}
+% A simple command to insert a logo on the cover page. The logo can be used to cover the
+% score in the next page, if the instructor places the score under the logo. Example of usage
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \placeCoverPageLogo{5in}{-1.5in}{\includegraphics{nwfsc_logo}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Working from the upper left corner, the first parameter is the amount to move to logo
+% to the right, the second parameter is the amount to move the logo vertically. The
+% Third parameter is the content; perhaps an \cs{includegraphics} command.
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2009/09/29}{Added \cs{placeCoverPageLogo} to insert a logo on the cover page.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\placeCoverPageLogo[3]{%
+    \def\eqe@insertLogo{\hbox to0pt{%
+        \hspace*{#1}\smash{\raisebox{#2}{#3}}\hss}}}
+\let\eqe@insertLogo\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define \cs{eqexcoverpage}, this command places \cs{eqe@insertLogo} and
+% \cs{eqex\-cover\-page\-design} in a group. It is this command that gets executed when
+% the user calls for the \texttt{coverpage} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqexcoverpage{%
+    \begingroup
+    \pagenumbering{roman}
+    \eqe@insertLogo
+    \eqexcoverpagedesign
+    \endgroup\newpage
+    \pagenumbering{arabic}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqexcoverpagedesign}
+%    The \texttt{eqexam} package allows for the possibility of a cover page,
+%    if the \texttt{coverpage} option is taken. This macro can and should be
+%    redefined to fit your needs. The definition below is just a
+%    representative example.
+%    \begin{macro}{\coverpagesubject}
+%    \begin{macro}{\coverpageUniversityFmt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\coverpageSubjectFmt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\coverpageTitleFmt}
+% The following four commands are used with the cover page.
+% The \cs{cover\-page\-sub\-ject} is used to provide a special subject
+% for the cover page, different from \cs{websubject}. The others
+% are used for formatting.
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2009/28/09}{Added these various Fmt commands for coverpage.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\coverpagesubject}[1]{\def\coverpage@subject{#1}}
+\let\coverpage@subject\@empty
+\def\eqexamsubject{\ifx\coverpage@subject\@empty\websubject
+    \else\coverpage@subject\fi}
+\newcommand{\coverpageUniversityFmt}[1]{%
+    \def\eqex@coverpageUniversityFmt{#1}}
+\coverpageUniversityFmt{\bfseries\large}
+\newcommand{\coverpageSubjectFmt}[1]{%
+    \def\eqex@coverpageSubjectFmt{#1}}
+\coverpageSubjectFmt{\bfseries\large}
+\newcommand{\coverpageTitleFmt}[1]{%
+    \def\eqex@coverpageTitleFmt{#1}}
+\coverpageTitleFmt{\bfseries\large}
+\newcommand\cpCID[1]{\def\cp@@CID{#1}}
+\let\cp@@CID\@empty
+%\newcommand\coverpageCID[1]{\def\cpCID@argi{#1}}
+\newcommand{\cpSetCIDWidth}[1]{\bgroup\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}
+    \xdef\cpCID@argi{\the\@tempdima}\egroup}
+\def\cp@CID{\bgroup\settowidth\eq@tmplengthA{\cp@@CID}%
+    \@tempdima=\cpCID@argi\relax
+    \advance\@tempdima-\eq@tmplengthA
+    \eqe@idinfohl{\makebox[\cpCID@argi][l]{\cp@@CID}}\egroup}
+\cpSetCIDWidth{2.25in}
+%\coverpageCID{2.25in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    When \texttt{coverpage} and \texttt{coverpagesumry} are used, an \textbf{Exam Record}
+%    is generated, just a summary may appear beneath the name and ID section of the cover
+%    page (\DescribeMacro{\qeSumryVert}\cmd{\qeSumryVert}) or to the right
+%    (\DescribeMacro{\eqeSumryHoriz}\cmd{\eqeSumryHoriz}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqeSumryVert{\def\eqe@SumryVert{\par\vfill}%
+    \let\eqe@SumryHoriz\relax
+    \def\eqe@@SumryVert{\vspace{\stretch{-1}}\bigskip}}
+\def\eqeSumryHoriz{\def\eqe@SumryHoriz{\hfill}\let\eqe@SumryVert\relax
+    \let\eqe@@SumryVert\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The default is a horizontal orientation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\eqeSumryHoriz
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We can name the components of the \textbf{Exam Record} by page or by parts. For the case
+%    they are named by parts, there are three options: You can used the exam name (the default);
+%    you can use the friendly name of the exam (the optional argument), executing
+%    \DescribeMacro{\useUIPartNames}\cmd{\useUIPartNames} invokes this option; you can use
+%    custom names (useful if the  friendly names are too long), execute the command
+%    \DescribeMacro{\useCustomPartNames}\cmd{\useCustomPartNames} for this option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@coverPageNaming{0}
+\newcommand{\useUIPartNames}{\def\eqe@coverPageNaming{1}}
+\newcommand{\useCustomPartNames}{\def\eqe@coverPageNaming{2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    When there is custom naming (\cmd{\customNaming}), we need to provide the user with a
+%    way of defining these custom names. \DescribeMacro{\customNaming}\cmd{\customNaming}
+%    provides that mechanism. The command takes two arguments, the first is
+%    \meta{name}, the exam name, the second is the associated \meta{text} the text that is to appear
+%    in the \textbf{Exam Record}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\customNaming}[2]{\@namedef{userCustom#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cpSetNameAndIDWidth}[1]{\bgroup
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
+    \xdef\cp@SetNameAndIDWidth{\the\@tempdima}\egroup}
+\cpSetNameAndIDWidth{.45\textwidth}
+\newcommand{\cpEnclNameAndID}[1]{\def\cp@EnclNameAndID{#1}}
+\let\cp@EnclNameAndID\@empty
+\newcommand{\cpSetHghtFrstLn}[1]{\def\cp@HghtFrstLn{#1}}
+\def\cp@HghtFrstLn{0pt}
+\def\cp@setHghtFrstLn{\rule[\cp@HghtFrstLn]{0pt}{0pt}}
+\newcommand\cpNameAndID{\noindent
+    \edef\eqExamName@argii{\cp@SetNameAndIDWidth}%
+    \edef\eqSID@argii{\cp@SetNameAndIDWidth}%
+    \edef\cpCID@argi{\cp@SetNameAndIDWidth}%
+    \cp@EnclNameAndID{\parbox[b]{\cp@SetNameAndIDWidth}{\parindent0pt
+    \cp@setHghtFrstLn\eq@ExamName\\[2ex]
+    \ifx\cp@@CID\@empty\eq@SID\else\cp@CID\fi\\[2ex]
+    \ifx\use@email\eqe@YES\eq@Email\\[2ex]\fi
+    \textcolor{\webauthor@color}{\webauthor}, \@date\vskip0pt}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we present the definition of \cs{eqexcoverpagedesign}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqexcoverpagedesign}
+{%
+    \begingroup
+    \parindent0pt
+    \thispagestyle{empty}
+%    \addtolength\textwidth{\oddsidemargin}
+    \vspace*{.1\textheight}
+    \noindent%\hspace*{-\oddsidemargin}%
+    \makebox[\linewidth]{\parbox{\linewidth}%
+        {\eqex@coverpageUniversityFmt
+        \color{\webuniversity@color}%
+        \centering\webuniversity}}
+    \par\vspace{.1\textheight}
+    \noindent%\hspace*{-\oddsidemargin}%
+    \makebox[\linewidth]{\parbox{\linewidth}%
+        {\eqex@coverpageSubjectFmt
+        \color{\websubject@color}%
+        \centering\eqexamsubject}}
+    \par\vspace{\bigskipamount}
+    \noindent%\hspace*{-\oddsidemargin}%
+    \makebox[\linewidth]{\parbox{\linewidth}%
+        {\eqex@coverpageTitleFmt
+         \color{\webtitle@color}%
+        \centering\webtitle}}
+    \par\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+    \optionalpagematter
+    \par\vspace{\stretch{1}}\cpNameAndID
+    \eqe@SumryHoriz\eqe@SumryVert
+    \sumryAnnots
+    \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    The following are various local strings used in the \textbf{Exam Record}, the
+%    default is to use English words.
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpSumryHeader}
+%    The header that appears at the top of the box
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpSumryPts}
+%    The formatting for the number of points
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpSumryPage}
+%    The word for ``Page''
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpSumryTotal}
+%    The word for ``Total''
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpSumryGrade}
+%    The word for ``Grade''
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpSetSumryWidth}
+%    The width of the summary box
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpUsefbox}
+%    Enclose in an \cs{fbox}? The default is yes
+%    \begin{macro}{\cpNofbox}
+%    Do not enclose in an \cs{fbox}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cpSumryHeader}{\textbf{Exam Record}}
+\newcommand{\cpSumryPts}{\,\text{pts}}
+\newcommand{\cpSumryPage}{Page}
+\newcommand{\cpSumryTotal}{Total:}
+\newcommand{\cpSumryGrade}{Grade:}
+\newcommand{\cpSetSumryWidth}[1]{\bgroup\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}
+    \xdef\cp@SetSumryWidth{\the\@tempdima}\egroup}
+\cpSetSumryWidth{.5\textwidth}
+\newcommand{\cpUsefbox}{\let\cp@Usefbox\fbox}
+\cpUsefbox
+\newcommand{\cpNofbox}{\let\cp@Usefbox\mbox}
+\newcommand{\cprulelength}{1.5in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    A helper command used in \cs{cpSumybyparts}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cp@IsertNaming#1{%
+    \ifcase\eqe@coverPageNaming
+    #1\or\@nameuse{userFriendly#1}\or
+    \@nameuse{userCustom#1}\else#1\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \DescribeMacro{\cpSumrybyparts}
+%    The routine for building the summary box, where we list the statistics
+%    for each part.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cpSumrybyparts}{%
+    \eqe@@SumryVert\cp@Usefbox{%
+    \ifx\cp@Usefbox\fbox
+        \def\cp@sumryWdth{\cp@SetSumryWidth-2\fboxrule-2\fboxsep}\else
+    \def\cp@sumryWdth{\cp@SetSumryWidth}\fi
+    \begin{minipage}[b]{\cp@sumryWdth}\kern0pt
+        \begin{flushleft}
+            \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{\cprulelength}%
+            \edef\eqe@cprulelength{\the\eqetmplengtha}%
+            \csarg\ifx{NumberOfParts}\relax
+            \else
+                \count2=0
+                \medskip
+                \cpSumryHeader\par\parskip\bigskipamount
+                \def\\##1{\advance\count2by\csname ##1total\endcsname
+                \underbar{\makebox[0pt][l]{%
+                \cp@IsertNaming{##1}}\hspace*{\eqe@cprulelength}}%
+                / $\eqe@ptsFmt{\csname ##1total\endcsname}%
+                \cpSumryPts$\par}\thePartNames
+            \fi
+            \underbar{\makebox[0pt][l]{\cpSumryTotal}%
+                \hspace{\eqe@cprulelength}}/
+                $\eqe@ptsFmt{\the\count2\relax}\cpSumryPts$ \par
+            \underbar{\makebox[0pt][l]{\cpSumryGrade}%
+                \hspace{\eqe@cprulelength}}%
+            \ifx\cp@Usefbox\fbox\medskip\fi
+        \end{flushleft}\kern0pt
+    \end{minipage}}\par
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \DescribeMacro{\cpSumrybypages}
+%    The routine for building the summary box, where we list the statistics
+%    for each page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cpSumrybypages}{%
+    \eqe@@SumryVert\cp@Usefbox{%
+    \ifx\cp@Usefbox\fbox
+        \def\cp@sumryWdth{\cp@SetSumryWidth-2\fboxrule-2\fboxsep}\else
+    \def\cp@sumryWdth{\cp@SetSumryWidth}\fi
+    \begin{minipage}[b]{\cp@sumryWdth}\kern0pt
+        \begin{flushleft}
+            \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{\cprulelength}%
+            \edef\eqe@cprulelength{\the\eqetmplengtha}%
+            \csarg\ifx{NumberOfParts}\relax
+            \else\medskip\count0=0\relax\count2=0\relax
+                \cpSumryHeader\par\parskip\bigskipamount
+                \ifsolutionsAtEnd
+                    \@ifundefined{eqExamQuesLastPage}{\def\NUMPAGES{0}}
+                    {\edef\NUMPAGES{\@nameuse{eqExamQuesLastPage}}}%
+                \else
+                    \@ifundefined{eqExamLastPage}{\def\NUMPAGES{0}}
+                    {\edef\NUMPAGES{\@nameuse{eqExamLastPage}}}%
+                \fi
+                \@whilenum\count0<\NUMPAGES\relax\do{%
+                    \advance\count0by1\relax
+                    \@ifundefined{Page\the\count0total}{\count4=0\relax}
+                    {\count4=\@nameuse{Page\the\count0total}\relax}%
+                    \csarg\ifx{Page\the\count0spilltotal}\relax
+                    \else\advance\count4by\csname%
+                        Page\the\count0spilltotal\endcsname\relax\fi
+                    \advance\count2by\count4\relax\underbar{%
+                    \makebox[0pt][l]{\cpSumryPage~\the\count0}%
+                    \hspace*{\eqe@cprulelength}}/
+                        $\eqe@ptsFmt{\the\count4\relax}%
+                        \cpSumryPts$\csarg\ifx{Page\the\count0spilltotal}\relax
+                        \else\ $(\@nameuse{Page\the\count0spilltotal}%
+                            \cpSumryPts+\@nameuse{Page\the\count0total}%
+                            \cpSumryPts)$\fi\par
+                }%
+            \fi
+            \underbar{\makebox[0pt][l]{\cpSumryTotal}%
+                \hspace{\eqe@cprulelength}}/
+                $\eqe@ptsFmt{\the\count2\relax}\cpSumryPts$\par
+            \underbar{\makebox[0pt][l]{\cpSumryGrade}%
+                \hspace{\eqe@cprulelength}}%
+            \ifx\cp@Usefbox\fbox\medskip\fi
+        \end{flushleft}\kern0pt
+    \end{minipage}}\par
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the author takes the \texttt{coverpage} option, \cs{eqex@coverpage} is set equal
+% to \cs{eqexcoverpagedesign}, otherwise, it is set equal to \cs{relax}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\eqex@coverpage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Insert Points in Margins and Compute Page Totals}
+% Here we attempt to place point values of a problem in the margins and
+% to compute the page totals.
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\probvalue}
+% This is a fundamental macro for keeping track of the points of the problem.
+% It increments the counter \texttt{eqpointvalue}, which keeps a running total
+% of the points of the current part of the exam, puts the value in the margins,
+% and sets a \texttt{mark}, so that at the end of the page, we can compute the
+% number of points on the current page. This macro is used in several situations,
+% for example, in the \texttt{problem} environment, \cs{manualcalcparts} and in
+% \cs{autocaleparts}. \textbf{Should not be redefined}.
+%\begin{flushleft}
+%Parameters
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%#1 = total points for this problem
+%#2 = 0 if total points, otherwise, #2 is the number of points each
+%     problem.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{flushleft}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@marktotalvalue{\global\let\eqe@innermarkpts\relax
+    \if@bypasseqexamheading\else\def\eqe@marktxt{%
+        \theeqpointvalue\@nameuse{eqExam}\theeq@numparts}%
+    \ifx\endparts\endexercise@parts@tabular
+        \xdef\eqe@innermarkpts{\noexpand\mark{\eqe@marktxt}}\else
+        \mark{\eqe@marktxt}\fi\fi}
+\def\probvalue#1#2{\addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{#1}%
+    \ifdispl@yPoints\marginpoints{#1}{#2}\fi
+    \@marktotalvalue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\widthtpboxes} is the width of the box in the margins that
+% contains the points or totals. The design of the box keys off this width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\widthtpboxes}{35pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\marginboxdesign} is the basic box that encloses the points
+% on the right, and the totals. This box may be redefined as desired, in which case,
+% \cs{measurePtBoxHt} should be re-executed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\marginboxdesign}[2][]{%
+    \parbox{\widthtpboxes}{\tabcolsep=0pt\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{|c|}\hline
+            \vrule height15pt width0pt#1\\\hline
+            \makebox[\widthtpboxes-2\fboxrule]{#2}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqleftmarginbox}
+% This macro places the problem value in the left margin, can be redefined, if you dare.
+%\begin{flushleft}
+% Parameters
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%#1 = total points for this problem
+%#2 = 0 if total points, otherwise, #2 is the number of points each
+%     problem.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{flushleft}
+% Currently, this macro is not used so I'll make it into verbatim text.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\eqleftmarginbox}[2]{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+    \setlength\tabcolsep{0pt}%
+    \raisebox{-.5\height}[0pt][0pt]{%
+        \marginboxdesign{\marginpointsboxtext{#1}{#2}}%
+    }\hspace*{\marginparsep}\hspace*{\eqemargin}}%
+}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \paragraph*{Formatting the points}
+%    \begin{macro}{\ptsLabel}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eachLabel}
+%    \begin{macro}{\pointsLabel}
+%  The following three convenience commands can be used to localize some of
+%  the strings to other languages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\ptsLabel}[1]{\def\eqptsLabel{#1}}\ptsLabel{pts}
+\providecommand{\ptLabel}[1]{\def\eqptLabel{#1}}\ptLabel{pt}
+\newcommand{\eachLabel}[1]{\def\eqeachLabel{#1}}\eachLabel{ea.}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% These next two are used by the \texttt{instructions} environment to display
+% the points for the exam.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pointsLabel}[1]{%
+    \def\eqpointsLabel{#1}}\pointsLabel{points}
+\newcommand{\pointLabel}[1]{%
+    \def\eqpointLabel{#1}}\pointLabel{point}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \paragraph*{pointsonleft or pointsonboth}
+%    \begin{macro}{\marginpointtext}
+% Creates the text for \cs{eqleftmargin} to use. From the macro definition,
+% if \texttt{\#2} is 0, then we write the points for the problem, else, we write
+% the points each for the problem. \DescribeMacro{\leftmarginPtsTxt}\cmd{\leftmarginPtsTxt}
+% is the formatting for the total points for the problem; while
+% \DescribeMacro{\leftmarginPtsEaTxt}\cmd{\leftmarginPtsEaTxt} is the formatting
+% for the \verb!{problem*}{<num>ea}!-type problems.
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\pointsAsText}
+% We begin by giving the user a choice, typeset
+% the points in math mode (the default) or typeset in the normal font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pointsAsText{\def\eqe@ptsFmt{\text}}
+\let\eqe@ptsFmt\relax
+\@onlypreamble\pointsAsText
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\marginpointtext} determines, based on \texttt{\#2}
+% whether the points are `points each' or not, and calls either
+% \cmd{\leftmarginPtsTxt} or \cmd{\leftmarginPtsTxt}, as appropriate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\marginpointtext}[2]{\ifnum#2=0\leftmarginPtsTxt{#1}\else
+    \leftmarginPtsEaTxt{#2}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\leftmarginPtsTxt} displays points in the left margin:
+% \mbox{(\small$\texttt{\#1}^{\mbox{\scriptsize{pt}}}$)} or
+% \mbox{(\small$\texttt{\#1}^{\mbox{\scriptsize{pts}}}$)},
+% where \texttt{\#1} is the number of points for this problem.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\leftmarginPtsTxt}[1]{(\small$\eqe@ptsFmt{#1}^{\text{%
+    \ifnum#1=1\relax\eqptLabel\else\eqptsLabel\fi}}$)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\leftmarginPtsEaTxt} displays `points each' in the left margin:
+% \mbox{(\small$\texttt{\#1}_{\mbox{\scriptsize{ea.}}}^{\mbox{\scriptsize{pt}}}$)} or
+% \mbox{(\small$\texttt{\#1}_{\mbox{\scriptsize{ea.}}}^{\mbox{\scriptsize{pts}}}$)},
+% where \texttt{\#1} is the number of points for each part of this problem.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\leftmarginPtsEaTxt}[1]{(\small$\eqe@ptsFmt{#1}_{\text{%
+    \eqeachLabel}}^{\text{\ifnum#1=1\relax\eqptLabel\else
+    \eqptsLabel\fi}}$)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqleftmargin}
+% Places the number of points (or points each) in the left margin. Can be redefined as
+% desired. This macro is used when author chooses the \texttt{pointsonleft}
+% or \texttt{pointsonbothsides} option. The text for the points is defined above,
+% \cmd{\marginpointtext}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqleftmargin}[2]{\makebox[0pt][r]{\marginpointtext{#1}{#2}%
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{\marginparsep+\eqemargin}%
+    \hspace*{\@tempdima}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \paragraph*{pointsonright or pointsonboth}
+%    \begin{macro}{\marginpointsboxtext}
+% When the author selects \texttt{pointsonright} or \texttt{pointsonbothsides}, a box
+% appears in the right margin containing problem totals, this is the text for the box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\marginpointsboxtext}[2]{\small$\eqe@ptsFmt{#1}\,\text{%
+    \ifnum#1=1\relax\eqptLabel\else\eqptsLabel\fi}$}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqrightmarginbox}
+% When the author selects \texttt{pointsonright} or \texttt{pointsonbothsides}, a box
+% appears in the right margin containing problem totals, this is the box that appears.
+%    \begin{macro}{\insertPointsBoxPDF}
+%    \begin{macro}{\insertTotalsBoxPDF}
+% These two commands are \cmd{\let}ing them be either a form field (that the
+% document author can fill in during online grading, or as \cs{relax}. It depends
+% on whether the \texttt{email} option is taken or not.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@insertPointsBoxPDF
+{
+    \def\fieldName{pointsgiven.\curr@quiz.page\thepage.%
+        \theeqquestionnoi}%
+    \calcTextField[\F\FHidden\BC{}\Q1\textColor{1 0 0 rg}]
+        {\fieldName}{\widthtpboxes}{15pt}%
+}
+\def\@insertTotalsBoxPDF
+{
+    \def\fieldName{pagetotals.\curr@quiz.page\thepage}%
+    \calcTextField[\F\FHidden\BC{}\Q1\textColor{1 0 0 rg}
+        \AA{\AACalculate{AFSimple_Calculate("SUM",
+            new Array("pointsgiven.\curr@quiz.page\thepage"));}}]
+    {\fieldName}{\widthtpboxes}{15pt}%
+}
+\ifx\use@email y
+    \let\insertPointsBoxPDF\@insertPointsBoxPDF
+    \let\insertTotalsBoxPDF\@insertTotalsBoxPDF
+\else
+    \let\insertPointsBoxPDF\@empty
+    \let\insertTotalsBoxPDF\@empty
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% The points box that appears in the left margin, may be re-defined, if you dare.
+% At the bottom of the box goes the points for the problem, if the \texttt{email} option
+% is used, in the top, a text field is inserted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqrightmarginbox}[2]{\makebox[0pt][l]{%
+        \setlength\tabcolsep{0pt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2011/05/08) new calculation for the right point box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \setlength{\@tempdima}{\textwidth-\eqemargin+\marginparsep}%
+        \hspace*{\@tempdima}%
+        \raisebox{-.5\height}[0pt][0pt]{%
+            \marginboxdesign[\insertPointsBoxPDF]%
+                {\marginpointsboxtext{#1}{#2}}%
+        }\hfil
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At the end of each exam \verb!\end{exam}! the part totals can be optionally
+% displayed on the right. This is the box for doing that.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqeomarginboxright}[2]{\makebox[0pt][l]{%
+        \setlength\tabcolsep{0pt}%
+        \setlength{\@tempdima}{\textwidth+\marginparsep-\parindent}%-\parindent
+        \hspace*{\@tempdima}%
+        \raisebox{-.5\height}[0pt][0pt]{%
+            \marginboxdesign[\insertTotalsBoxPDF]%
+                {\marginpointsboxtext{#1}{#2}}%
+        }\hfil
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At the end of each exam \verb!\end{exam}! the part totals can be optionally
+% displayed on the left. This is the box for doing that.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqeomarginboxleft}[2]{\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+    \raisebox{-.5\height}[0pt][0pt]{%
+        \marginboxdesign[\insertTotalsBoxPDF]%
+            {\marginpointsboxtext{#1}{#2}}%
+    }{\settowidth{\@tempdimb}{\eqe@hspannerPrb}%
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{\marginparsep+\eqemargin-\@tempdimb}%
+    \hspace*{\@tempdima}}}\hfil
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\measurePtBoxHt} We measure the height of our point/total boxes and store it
+% in the length \cs{eq@pointboxtotalheight}, which is used
+% to separate the boxes so they don't overlap.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\measurePtBoxHt}{\setbox\eq@pointbox\hbox{%
+        \marginboxdesign{\marginpointsboxtext{00}{0}}%
+    }\setlength\eq@pointboxtotalheight{.5\ht\eq@pointbox}%
+    \xdef\halfHtPtBox{\the\eq@pointboxtotalheight}%
+    \setlength\eq@pointboxtotalheight{\dp\eq@pointbox+\ht\eq@pointbox}%
+    \xdef\totHtPtBox{\the\eq@pointboxtotalheight}%
+    \xdef\dpPtBox{\the\dp\eq@pointbox}%
+    \xdef\htPtBox{\the\ht\eq@pointbox}%
+}
+\measurePtBoxHt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% A helper command to set both margin boxes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqbothmargins}[2]{\eqleftmargin{#1}{#2}%
+    \eqrightmarginbox{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The macro \cs{probvalue}, defined above, says
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\mark{\theeqpointvalue\csname eqExam\endcsname\theeq@numparts}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% so the \cs{botmark} contains the point value of this page and the part number for
+% this page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lastparttotaled{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{botmark} looks like \texttt{18\string\eqExam0}, where $18$ will be the total number of
+% points accumulated for this exam part. We need to retrieve these number, I don't remember why
+% I save them this way.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\parsetotals}
+% The \cs{parsetotals} macro is called in \cs{settotalsbox} to retrieve the ongoing point values
+% from \cs{botmark}, and returns two parameters, contained in \cs{argi} and \cs{argiii}.
+% \DescribeMacro{\stripeqExam}
+% Whereas, \cs{stripeqExam} just retrieves the first parameter only.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parsetotals#1\eqExam#2\end{\def\argi{#1}\def\argii{#2}}
+\def\stripeqExam#1\eqExam{\def\argii{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\settotalsbox}
+% This is the box containing the page total, it may appear on the left or right side bottom
+% corner.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\settotalsbox{%
+    \expandafter\parsetotals\botmark\eqExam\end
+    \ifx\argi\@empty\hfil
+    \else\ifx\argii\@empty\hfil
+        \else
+            \expandafter\stripeqExam\argii
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set \texttt{eqpointsthispage} equal to \cs{argi}, which should be the accumulated total
+% for this part of the test so far.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \setcounter{eqpointsthispage}{\argi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This subtract \texttt{eqpointsofar}, which should be the total for this test part through the
+% previous page. The difference is the number of points for this page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \addtocounter{eqpointsthispage}{-\value{eqpointsofar}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we set \texttt{eqpointsofar} to the new accumulated total \cs{argi}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \setcounter{eqpointsofar}{\argi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And save to the auxiliary file for later usage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \xdef\lastparttotaled{\argii}%
+            \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef{Page\thepage total}%
+                {\theeqpointsthispage}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, place the totals box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \totalsbox
+        \fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\totalsboxtext} This is the text that appears in the totals boxes
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\totalsboxtext{\small$
+    \eqe@ptsFmt{\theeqpointsthispage}\,\text{%
+    \ifnum\theeqpointsthispage=1\relax\eqptLabel\else
+    \eqptsLabel\fi}$}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\eqevtranstotbox}\cmd{\eqevtranstotbox} is a length
+% that can be used to raise or lower the position of the total boxes
+% in the left/right bottom corner. The default is \texttt{0pt}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\eqevtranstotbox
+\setlength{\eqevtranstotbox}{0pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\totalsboxleft}\DescribeMacro{\totalsboxright} There are two totals boxes, one for the left and one
+% for the right side. These can be redefined as desired.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@chkZeroTotals{\let\eqe@allow\eqe@YES
+    \ifx\eqe@zeroTotalsAllowed\eqe@NO
+    \ifnum\theeqpointsthispage=0 \let\eqe@allow\eqe@NO\fi\fi}
+\newcommand{\totalsboxleft}{\eqe@chkZeroTotals
+    \ifx\eqe@allow\eqe@YES
+    \makebox[0pt][r]{\setlength\tabcolsep{0pt}%
+        \raisebox{-\height+\eqevtranstotbox}[0pt][0pt]{%
+            \marginboxdesign[\insertTotalsBoxPDF]{\totalsboxtext}%
+        }\hspace*{\marginparsep}%
+    }\fi\hfil
+}
+\newcommand{\totalsboxright}{\eqe@chkZeroTotals
+    \ifx\eqe@allow\eqe@YES
+    \makebox[0pt][l]{\setlength\tabcolsep{0pt}%
+        \hspace*{\textwidth}\hspace*{\marginparsep}%
+        \raisebox{-\height+\eqevtranstotbox}[0pt][0pt]{%
+            \marginboxdesign[\insertTotalsBoxPDF]{\totalsboxtext}%
+        }%
+    }\fi\hfil
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We begin the document by declaring the current part is part 0 with 0 points. This is the default,
+% in case the author writes a document with no parts or points!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifeqe@nopoints\else\if@bypasseqexamheading\else
+\AtBeginDocument{\mark{0\csname eqExam\endcsname0}}
+\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At the end of the document, we write out the number of parts for this test, and
+% the names of the parts the author has given each part.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef{NumberOfParts}%
+        {\arabic{eq@numparts}}}%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef{thePartNames}%
+        {\the\partNames}}%
+    \clearpage\addtocounter{page}{-1}\writelastpage\relax
+    \addtocounter{page}{1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\theGrandTotal}
+% When an exam has multiple parts, the total of each part is computed
+% and the grand total is computed with \cs{theGrandTotal}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\theGrandTotal{%
+    $\eqe@ptsFmt{\csname eqeGrandTotal\endcsname}$}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\totalForPart}
+% User access to the total for a exam environment, one argument, the name of the exam.
+%    \begin{macro}{\percentForPart}
+% Attempts to calculate the percent of the total that the referenced exam (\texttt{\#1})
+% contributes to the grand total.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\totalForPart}[1]{$\eqe@ptsFmt{\csname#1total\endcsname}$}
+\def\tot@lForPart#1{\csname#1total\endcsname}
+\newcommand{\percentForPart}[1]{$\eqe@ptsFmt
+    {\csname#1percent\endcsname}$\%}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Computing Number of Points within a Segment of the Exam}
+%
+% We add some commands for calculating number of points in a segment of the exam.
+% A segment being defined subset of consecutive problems within an exam. We can
+% define segments by placing markers (using \cs{placeMarkerHere}) between problems. We can
+% then calculate the total number of points between markers.
+%
+% The counter below is a scratch counter for making the calculations. We assume the
+% \texttt{calc} package is loaded, it does the work for us.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{markerCnt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\placeMarkerHere}
+% Placed outside of any \texttt{problem}/\texttt{problem*} environment, this command
+% takes one argument, the symbolic name for this marker. We write to the auxiliary file
+% and define a command whose name is based on \texttt{\#1}, and whose value is
+% the cumulative total \cs{theeqpointvalue}.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2008/11/02}
+%{
+%  Added a set of commands \cs{placeMarkerHere}, \cs{calcFromMarkers},
+%  and \cs{markerTotalFmt} to enable the calculation of totals of segments
+%  of the exam.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\placeMarkerHere#1{%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+        {#1SaveTotalHere}{\theeqpointvalue}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\calcFromMarkers}
+% Once the markers are in place, we can calculate the number of points defined between
+% two such markers. The \cs{calcFromMarkers} takes three arguments, \texttt{\#2} and
+% \texttt{\#3} are the symbolic names of the two markers. While, \texttt{\#1} is an optional
+% argument for formatting the calculation. The default is \cs{@markerTotalFmt}, defined
+% below in \cs{markerTotalFmt}. The value of the total is \cs{themarkerCnt}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\calcFromMarkers}[3][\@markerTotalFmt]{%
+    \@ifundefined{#2SaveTotalHere}{}%
+        {\@ifundefined{#3SaveTotalHere}{}{\setcounter{markerCnt}%
+        {\@nameuse{#2SaveTotalHere}-\@nameuse{#3SaveTotalHere}}%
+        \ifnum\value{markerCnt}<0\relax
+        \setcounter{markerCnt}{-\value{markerCnt}}\fi#1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\markerTotalFmt}
+% Used to set the global format of the marker totals. The value of the marker total
+% is \cs{themarkerCnt}. The default follows the definition of \cs{markerTotalFmt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\markerTotalFmt}[1]{\def\@markerTotalFmt{#1}}
+\markerTotalFmt{\space(\themarkerCnt\space points)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\calcQsBtwnMarkers}
+% \changes{v3.1}{2012/05/16}{Added \cs{calcQsBtwnMarkers}}
+% \cs{calcQsBtwnMarkers[\meta{Mrk2}]}|{|\meta{Mrk1}|}| does a number of things; primarily,
+% it determines the range of the questions between the two marks. The names of the
+% commands produced are all based in the first marker name \meta{Mrk1}.
+% \DescribeMacro{ \bslash\meta{Mrk1}Start}\cs{\meta{Mrk1}Start} is the first question number that follows the
+% the placement of \cs{calcQsBtwnMarkers}. Similarly,
+% \DescribeMacro{ \bslash\meta{Mrk1}End}\cs{\meta{Mrk1}End}
+% is the last question number between the two marks \meta{Mrk1} and \meta{Mrk2}.
+%
+% We also calculate \DescribeMacro{ \bslash\meta{Mrk1}nQs}\cs{\meta{Mrk1}nQs}, the number of questions appearing between
+% \meta{Mrk1} and \meta{Mrk2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\calcQsBtwnMarkers}[2][]{\setcounter{markerCnt}{0}%
+    \def\eqe@argi{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{\meta{Mrk1}thisQnum} is the question number in effect at the point where
+% the command \cs{calcQsBtwnMarkers} is inserted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+        {#2thisQnum}{\theeqquestionnoi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{\meta{Mrk1}Start} is 0 if undefined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifundefined{#2thisQnum}{\csarg\xdef{#2Start}{0}%
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+            {#2Start}{0}}%
+    }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{\meta{Mrk1}Start} is the current question number plus 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \setcounter{markerCnt}{\value{eqquestionnoi}+1}\csarg
+        \xdef{#2Start}{\the\value{markerCnt}}%
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+            {#2Start}{\@nameuse{#2Start}}}%
+    }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Using now both \meta{Mrk1} and \meta{Mrk2} we calculate the difference
+% in the two. Result held in \texttt{markerCnt}. If there is no optional parameter, \meta{Mrk2},
+% do not produce the \cs{\meta{Mrk1}thisQnum}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eqe@argi\@empty\else
+    \@ifundefined{#2thisQnum}{\setcounter{markerCnt}{0}}%
+        {\@ifundefined{#1thisQnum}{\setcounter{markerCnt}{0}}{%
+        \setcounter{markerCnt}%
+            {\@nameuse{#1thisQnum}-\@nameuse{#2thisQnum}}%
+    }}%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{\meta{Mrk1}nQs} is the number of questions that appear between
+% \meta{Mrk1} and \meta{Mrk2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \csarg\xdef{#2nQs}{\the\value{markerCnt}}%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+    {#2nQs}{\the\value{markerCnt}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{\meta{Mrk1}End} is 0 if undefined. If there is no optional parameter, \meta{Mrk2},
+% do not produce the \cs{\meta{Mrk1}End}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eqe@argi\@empty\else
+        \@ifundefined{#1thisQnum}{\csarg\xdef{#2End}{0}%
+            \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+                \csarg\string\gdef{#2End}{0}}%
+        }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{\meta{Mrk1}End} is \cs{\meta{Mrk2}thisQnum}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \csarg\xdef{#2End}{\@nameuse{#1thisQnum}}%
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+            {#2End}{\@nameuse{#2End}}}%
+        }%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\markStartFor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\markEndtFor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\markNumQsFor}
+% We provide a user interface to the three macros defined above. The required
+% parameter is a mark (a name that was used as the first argument of
+% \cmd{\calcQsBtwnMarkers}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\markStartFor}[1]{\@nameuse{#1Start}}
+\newcommand{\markEndFor}[1]{\@nameuse{#1End}}
+\newcommand{\markNumQsFor}[1]{\@nameuse{#1nQs}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Useful Commands to Write Problems}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\cs{placeAtxy}}{\textbackslash{placeAtxy}} command}
+%    \begin{macro}{\placeAtxy}
+%    Use to place material within the solutions area that is visible to the student
+%    on the test document. Syntax:
+%    \begin{quote}\switchCats\ttfamily
+%    \string\placeAtxy{\meta(x\_dim)}{\meta(y\_dim)}{\meta(content)}
+%    \end(quote)
+% \cs{placeAtxy} goes immediately after \verb!\end{solution}!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\placeAtxy}[3]{{%
+    \par\nointerlineskip
+    \ifdisplayworkarea
+        \ifx\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@YES
+            \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace*{-\parindent}\hspace*{#1}%
+            \raisebox{#2}[0pt][0pt]{#3}}\fi
+    \fi
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \subsubsection{The \texttt{workarea} environment}
+% As of this writing, 2012/12/09, this segment of code has been re-written. The
+% \texttt{splitsolution} and \texttt{panel} environments have a new syntax. I've never
+% gotten any feedback from user who use these environments, so I suspect the impact
+% of these changes are minimal.
+%    \begin{environment}{workarea}
+% A work area is an environment used when we display vertical space such as when the
+% \texttt{nosolutions} and \texttt{vspacewithsolns} options are in effect.
+% \DescribeMacro{\workareasb}\cmd{\workareasb} is a save box used in the
+% argument of \texttt{lrbox} to save the contents of the \texttt{minipage}.
+%    \begin{quote}\switchCats\ttfamily
+%    \string\begin{workarea}[\meta(width)]{\meta(depth)}\\
+%    ...\\
+%    \string\end{workarea}
+%    \end(quote)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newsavebox{\workareasb}
+\newenvironment{workarea}[2][\linewidth]
+{%
+    \removelastparskip
+    \edef\workareadepth{\if\currhideopt H0pt\else#2\fi}%
+    \begin{lrbox}{\workareasb}\setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{#1}%
+    \begin{minipage}[b][\workareadepth][t]{\eqetmplengtha}\vspace*{3pt}%
+}{%
+    \end{minipage}\end{lrbox}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \texttt{4/5/11} Changed the logic here, so the \texttt{workarea} is available
+% for the \texttt{vspace\-with\-solns} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \par\ifdisplayworkarea
+            \ifx\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@YES
+            \removelastparskip
+            \vspace{-\baselineskip}%
+            \if\currhideopt H\else
+                \noindent\strut\smash{\usebox{\workareasb}}%
+            \fi\fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+% \subsubsection{The \texttt{splitsolution} environment}
+%    \begin{environment}{splitsolution}
+%\changes{v3.2}{2012/12/10}{Rewrote splitsolution and related code to change the syntax.}
+% This is a special solution environment designed for use with the
+% \texttt{online} or \texttt{email} options, but it is compatible with all other options
+% as well.\par\medskip\noindent
+%\begin{minipage}{.55\linewidth}
+%\textbf{New Syntax}\\[3pt]
+%\begingroup\small
+%    \switchCats\ttfamily
+%    \string\begin{splitsolution}[\meta(width)][\meta(depth)]\\
+%    \string\begin{panel}[l\string|r]\\
+%    ...\\
+%    \string\end{panel}\\
+%    \string\begin{solution}\\
+%    ...\\
+%    \string\end{solution}\\
+%    \string\end{splitsolution}
+%\par\endgroup
+%\end{minipage}\hfil
+%\begin{minipage}{.45\linewidth}
+%\textbf{Old Syntax}\\[3pt]
+%\begingroup\small
+%    \switchCats\ttfamily
+%    \string\begin{splitsolution}{\meta(depth)}\\
+%    \string\begin{panel}[l\string|r]{\meta(width)}\\
+%    ...\\
+%    \string\end{panel}\\
+%    \string\begin{solution}\\
+%    ...\\
+%    \string\end{solution}\\
+%    \string\end{splitsolution}
+%\par\endgroup
+%\end{minipage}
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+% The \texttt{panel} writes its contents to a CUT file, then inputs it back
+%in to get its dimensions, it places the contents in the box
+%\cs{eqpanelbox}.
+%
+% Below is an example of the use of the \texttt{splitsolution} environment
+% (which is defined well below here).
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{problem}[5]
+%This is a question worth $5$ points.
+%\begin{splitsolution}
+%\begin{panel}\relax
+%\includegraphics[scale=.2]{fig1}
+%\end{panel}
+%\begin{solution}
+%This a really good  solution and worthy of a $5$ points.
+%\end{solution}
+%\end{splitsolution}
+%\end{problem}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Here, we include a graphic. We put it into a box, \cs{eqpanelbox} to get its dimensions.
+% The \texttt{splitsolution} environment has one required argument, the total height of the
+% solution. We then place the graphic in the \texttt{panel} environment, and write the solution
+% in the usual way.
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+% We arrive at the \DescribeEnv{splitsolution}\texttt{splitsolution} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\splitsolution{%
+    \@ifnextchar[{\splitsolutioni}%
+        {\splitsolutioniii{\panelwidth}{\panelheight}}%
+}
+\def\splitsolutioni[#1]{%
+    \@ifnextchar[{\splitsolutionii{#1}}
+        {\splitsolutioniii{\panelwidth}{#1}}%
+}
+\def\splitsolutionii#1[#2]{%
+    \splitsolutioniii{#1}{#2}%
+}
+\def\splitsolutioniii#1#2{%
+    \@ifundefined{panel@write}{\newwrite\panel@write}{}%
+    \gdef\ss@Argiii{#1}\gdef\ss@Argii{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here, we \cs{let} \cs{solution} to \cs{@sssolution} and replace it with
+% \cs{@ssSolution}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\@sssolution\solution
+    \let\end@sssolution\endsolution
+    \let\solution\@ssSolution
+    \let\endsolution\end@ssSolution
+    \par\noindent\ignorespaces
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{panel} environment should appear next, just after the \verb!\begin{splitslution}!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}
+\def\endsplitsolution{%
+    \ifeq@solutionsafter\strut\par\fi
+    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else
+        \advance\linewidth-\leadinIndentPrtSep\fi %%dps
+    \edef\eqe@workwidth{\if\ss@Argi l\noexpand\ss@Argiii
+        \else\noexpand\linewidth\fi}%
+    \edef\eqe@workfill{\if\ss@Argi l\else\hfill\fi}%
+    \begin{workarea}[\eqe@workwidth]{\eqedepth}%
+    \let\panelGetDimen\relax%
+    \eqe@workfill\input{panel\thepanel@cnt.cut}%
+    \end{workarea}
+    \strut\par
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+% \DescribeMacro{\panelgap}\cs{panelgap} is the separation between solution area
+% and the panel. \DescribeMacro{\eqpanelbox} is a box to put things into, to measure their
+% dimensions. The user accessible commands \DescribeMacro{\panelwidth}\cs{panelwidth} returns the
+% width and \DescribeMacro{\panelheight}\cs{panelheight} the height. There is a special counter
+% \DescribeMacro{panel@cnt}\texttt{panel@cnt} to keep track of the panels generated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\panelgap{3pt}
+\newsavebox{\eqpanelbox}
+\newdimen\eqepanelwidth
+\newdimen\eqepanelheight
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \DescribeMacro{\getDimSSPanel}\cs{getDimSSPanel} is an internal command. It
+% places it argument in the box \cs{eqpanelbox} and gets its dimensions. It
+% save the dimensions as \cs{eqepanelwidth} and \cs{eqepanelheight} (the total height).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\getDimSSPanel}[1]{%
+    \sbox{\eqpanelbox}{#1}%
+    \eqepanelwidth=\wd\eqpanelbox
+    \eqepanelheight=\ht\eqpanelbox
+    \advance\eqepanelheight by\the\dp\eqpanelbox
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\panelwidth}\cs{panelwidth} and \DescribeMacro{\panelheight}\cs{panelheight}
+% are aliases for the dimension registers. This is for compatibility with previous versions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\panelwidth{\eqepanelwidth}
+\def\panelheight{\eqepanelheight}
+\newcounter{panel@cnt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{panel} environment goes inside the \texttt{splitsolution}
+% environment. Permissible values of the first parameter are \texttt{r} and
+% \texttt{l}, the default being \texttt{l}. This is the alignment parameter.
+% The second argument is the width of the panel.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\panel{\def\eqe@panelir{\eqe@paneli[r]}%
+    \@ifnextchar[{\eqe@paneli}
+        {\@ifnextchar\relax{\expandafter\eqe@panelir\@gobble}%
+            {\eqe@paneli[r]}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We continue the \texttt{panel} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@paneli[#1]{%
+    \gdef\ss@Argi{#1}\def\eqe@l{l}\def\eqe@r{r}%
+    \ifx\ss@Argi\@empty\gdef\ss@Argi{r}\else
+    \ifx\eqe@l\ss@Argi\else\ifx\eqe@r\ss@Argi\else
+    \PackageError{eqexam}{Permissible arguments for panel are l and r}
+    {Use l or r for the argument of panel.}\fi\fi\fi
+    \stepcounter{panel@cnt}%
+    \immediate\openout \panel@write panel\thepanel@cnt.cut
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Manage the \texttt{h}, \texttt{H}, and global overrides.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if\currhideopt H%
+        \eqe@IWO\panel@write{\vfill}%
+        \immediate\closeout\panel@write
+        \gdef\ss@Argii{0pt}%
+    \else
+        \if\currhideopt h\ifeq@solutionsafter\else
+            \ifeq@globalshowsolutions\else
+                \eqe@IWO\panel@write{\vfill}%
+                \immediate\closeout\panel@write
+                \gdef\ss@Argii{0pt}%
+            \fi\fi
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Write the contents of this environment to the file
+% \texttt{panel\string\thepanel@cnt.cut}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\verbatim@out\panel@write
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We begin by writing \verb!\panelGetDimen{%! to the CUT file
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {\lccode`C=`\%\lccode`P=`\{
+        \lowercase{\eqe@IWO\verbatim@out{\string\panelGetDimen PC}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Followed by the verbatim listing of the \texttt{panel} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \verbatimwrite
+}
+\def\endpanel{%
+    \endverbatimwrite
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% After the verbatim write, we write \verb!}! to close off the argument
+% of \cs{panelGetDimen}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {\lccode`P=`\}\lowercase{\eqe@IWO\verbatim@out{P}}}%
+    \immediate\closeout\panel@write
+    \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The command \cs{eqePANEL} cut does all the work at the end of this environment.
+% We first \cs{let} \cs{panelGetDimen} to \cs{getDimenSSPanel} and input the
+% CUT file. This loads the panel contents into \cs{eqpanelbox}, and gets their
+% dimensions. We set the value of \cs{ss@Argiii} which is the width parameter
+% of the \texttt{splitsolution} environment. \cs{mp@Width} calculates the width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \gdef\eqePANELCUT{%
+        \let\panelGetDimen\getDimSSPanel
+        \input{panel\thepanel@cnt.cut}%
+        \setlength{\eq@tmpdima}{\ss@Argiii}%
+        \xdef\ss@Argiii{\the\eq@tmpdima}%
+        \xdef\mp@Width{\ifeq@solutionsafter\linewidth
+            \else\linewidth-\ss@Argiii-\panelgap\fi}%
+    }\aftergroup\eqePANELCUT
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{eqe@IW} is a macro that either writes verbatim text (\texttt{\#1}), or
+% it gobbles the argument, depending on whether have \texttt{solutionsafter}, \texttt{nosolutions},
+% hidden or not hidden.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\eqe@IW#1{%
+    \ifeq@solutionsafter
+        \let\eqe@next\@empty
+    \else
+        \def\eqe@next{\eqe@IWO\verbatim@out{#1}}%
+        \ifeq@nosolutions\else
+            \if\currhideopt H%
+                \gdef\ss@Argii{0pt}\let\eqe@next\@empty
+            \else
+                \if\currhideopt h%
+                    \ifeq@globalshowsolutions\else
+                        \gdef\ss@Argii{0pt}\let\eqe@next\@empty
+                    \fi
+                \fi
+            \fi
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \eqe@next
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{splitsolution} environment \cs{let}s the solution environment
+% to the internal \texttt{@ssSolution} environment. It performs various tasks
+% then turns it over to the old solution environment, which has been \cs{let}
+% to \cs{@sssolution}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{@ssSolution}[1][\ss@Argii]%
+{%
+    \def\eqe@argi{#1}\ifx\eqe@argi\@empty\else
+%        \setlength{\eq@tmpdima}{#1}%
+%
+        \let\soln@keys@nLines\@empty
+        \edef\panelheight{\the\panelheight}%
+        \edef\panelwidth{\the\panelwidth}%
+        \edef\temp@exp{\noexpand
+            \setkeys*{soln@keys}{#1}}\temp@exp
+%        \setkeys*{soln@keys}{#1}%
+        \ifx\soln@keys@nLines\@empty
+            \edef\ss@Argii{\XKV@rm}%
+        \else
+            \@tempdima\wlVspace\relax
+            \@tempdima=\soln@keys@nLines\@tempdima
+            \edef\ss@Argii{\the\@tempdima}%
+            \ifx\XKV@rm\@empty\else
+                \if@equsedim\edef\ss@Argii{\XKV@rm}\fi\fi
+        \fi
+        \setlength{\eq@tmpdima}{\ss@Argii}%
+%        \ifx\sameVspace\@empty\gdef\sameVspace{0pt}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \texttt{panelheight} is greater than the requested height,
+% we make the requested height equal to \texttt{panelheight}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifdim\eqepanelheight>\eq@tmpdima
+            \eq@tmpdima\eqepanelheight\fi
+        \xdef\ss@Argii{\the\eq@tmpdima}%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We calculate the depth of the solutions; this is generally the values
+% passed to use as the optional argument, and encapsuled by \cs{ss@Argii}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xdef\eqedepth{%
+        \ifvspacewithsolns\ss@Argii\else
+            \ifeq@nosolutions\ss@Argii\else
+            \ifeq@solutionsafter\ss@Argii\else0pt\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The width is either \cs{linewidth} or \verb!\linewidth-\ss@Argiii-\panelgap!,
+% where \cs{ss@Argiii} is the width of the panel.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xdef\mp@Width{\ifeq@solutionsafter\noexpand\linewidth\else
+        \noexpand\linewidth-\ss@Argiii-\panelgap\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If its a left panel\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if\ss@Argi l%
+        \ifeq@solutionsafter
+            \def\eqe@lPanel{\parbox[b][\eqedepth][t]{\ss@Argiii}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here, and elsewhere, we \cs{let} \cs{panelGetDimen} to \cs{relax} when we
+% want to purely input the CUT file in the solution.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                {\let\panelGetDimen\relax
+                \input{panel\thepanel@cnt.cut}\vfill}\hfill}%
+            \def\eqe@rPanel{\@empty}%
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For the left panel, we need to subtract \cs{eqemargin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \def\eqe@subleftgutter{-\string\eqemargin}%
+            \def\eqe@lPanel{%
+                \string\parbox[b][\string\eqedepth]{\ss@Argiii}%
+                {\string\let\string\panelGetDimen\string\relax
+                \string\input{panel\thepanel@cnt.cut}%
+                \string\vfill}\string\hfill^^J}%
+            \def\eqe@rPanel{\@empty}%
+        \fi
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If its a right panel\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifeq@solutionsafter
+            \def\eqe@lPanel{\@empty}%
+            \def\eqe@rPanel{%
+                \hfill\parbox[b][\eqedepth][t]{\ss@Argiii}
+                {\let\panelGetDimen\relax
+                \hfill\input{panel\thepanel@cnt.cut}\vfill}}%
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For the right panel, we do not to subtract \cs{eqemargin} as above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \let\eqe@subleftgutter\@empty
+            \def\eqe@lPanel{\@empty}%
+            \def\eqe@rPanel{%
+                \string\hfill\string\parbox[b][\string\eqedepth]%
+                {\ss@Argiii}{\string\endgraf%
+                    \string\noindent\string\hfill%
+                    \string\let\string\panelGetDimen\string\relax
+                    \string\input{panel\thepanel@cnt.cut}%
+                    \string\vfill}}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \let\verbatim@out\ex@solns
+    \par\ifeq@solutionsafter\smallskip\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Since everything is put a box, we set the \cs{linewidth}, and
+% set \cs{solutionparshape} to \cs{@empty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else
+        \advance\linewidth-\leadinIndentPrtSep\fi %%dps
+    \let\solutionparshape\@empty
+    \noindent\minipage{\linewidth}%
+    \if\ss@Argi l\noindent\parbox[b][\eqedepth][t]{\ss@Argiii}%
+        {\vfill}\hfill\fi
+    \minipage[b][\eqedepth][t]{\mp@Width}%
+    {\lccode`C=`\%\lowercase{\eqe@IW{%
+        \string\def\string\panelgap{\panelgap}%
+        \string\setlength{\string\panelwidth}{\ss@Argiii}%
+        \string\def\string\eqedepth
+            {\ifeq@nosolutions\ss@Argii\else\ss@Argii\fi}C}}}%
+    {\lccode`C=`\%\lowercase{\eqe@IW{%
+            \string\strut\string\noindent%
+%            \string\strut\par\string\nobreak\string\noindent%
+                \string\hbox\space to\string\linewidth\bgroup^^J%
+                \eqe@lPanel\string\minipage[b][\string\eqedepth][t]%
+                {\string\linewidth\eqe@subleftgutter%
+                    -\string\panelwidth-\string\panelgap}C
+     }}}%
+     \ifeq@solutionsafter
+        \noindent\strut\hbox to\linewidth\bgroup
+        \eqe@lPanel
+        \minipage[b][\eqedepth][t]{\linewidth-\ss@Argiii-\panelgap}%
+        \def\solutionsafterSkip{}%
+     \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here, we start the original definition of the solutions environment, which was \cs{let}
+% to \cs{@sssolution}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \ifx\soln@keys@nLines\@empty
+        \edef\passedss@Argii{\ss@Argii}\else
+        \edef\passedss@Argii{\ss@Argii,nLines=\soln@keys@nLines}\fi
+     \expandafter\@sssolution\expandafter[\passedss@Argii]%
+}{%
+    \eqe@IW{\string\endminipage\eqe@rPanel\egroup}%
+    \ifeq@solutionsafter\endminipage\eqe@rPanel\egroup\fi
+    \end@sssolution
+    \endminipage\endminipage
+}
+% Redefine the \cs{paragraph} command
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+    {\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{12pt}{-3pt}{\bfseries}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\defaultInstructions}
+% For the \texttt{instructions} environment, defined next, the default string
+% for the instructions is \cs{eq@default@Instructions}, this command is
+% defined using \cs{defaultInstructions}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\defaultInstructions}[1]{\def\eq@default@Instructions{#1}}
+\defaultInstructions{Instructions.}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{environment}{instructions}
+% Each test, or a part of a test usually have instructions. This \texttt{instruction}
+% environment is used in this purpose. Normally, the number of points for the part is
+% displayed following the heading (the default is \textbf{Instructions.}). You can
+% eliminate the total points from the instructions by taking the \texttt{nosummarytotals}
+% option.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\beforeInstrSkip}{1ex}
+\newcommand{\afterInstrSkip}{-0em}
+\newcommand\hInstrSpace{\ }
+\newcommand\styleInstr{\bfseries}
+\newenvironment{instructions}[1][\eq@default@Instructions]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If  \cs{summaryPointTotal} is zero, show no summary points.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifundefined{\thisexamlabel total}{\let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES}
+    {\ifnum\summaryPointTotal=0 \let\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES\fi}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\eq@argi\expandafter{#1}%
+    \def\hsi{\hInstrSpace}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We start a paragraph environment
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+    {\beforeInstrSkip\space\@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+    {\afterInstrSkip}{\normalfont\normalsize\styleInstr}*%
+    {\textcolor{\@instructionsColor}{#1}\normalcolor%
+    \ifx\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES\else\ifx\eq@argi\@empty\else\hsi\fi
+        {\normalfont\summaryTotalsTxt}\hsi\fi}\hskip-\lastskip
+    \ifx\eq@nosummarytotals\eqe@YES\ifx\eq@argi\@empty\else\hsi\fi\fi
+    \normalfont\normalsize\ignorespaces
+}{\par\vskip\beforeInstrSkip\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\summaryPointTotal}\DescribeMacro{\summaryPointTotal} contains the total points
+% for the current exam; the command \cmd\summaryTotalsTxt\DescribeMacro\summaryTotalsTxt\ defines its the formatting
+% for the points. The command \cmd\nQuesInExam\DescribeMacro\nQuesInExam\ is the total number
+% of questions in the exam.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\summaryPointTotal{\csname\thisexamlabel total\endcsname}
+\newcommand\summaryTotalsTxt{($\eqe@ptsFmt{\summaryPointTotal}\,\text{%
+    \@ifundefined{\thisexamlabel total}{\eqpointsLabel}%
+    {\ifnum\summaryPointTotal=1\relax\eqpointLabel\else
+    \eqpointsLabel\fi}}$)}
+\newcommand{\nQuesInExam}[1][\thisexamlabel]{%
+    \def\eqe@argi{#1}%
+    \ifx\thisexamlabel\@empty\ifx\eqe@argi\thisexamlabel
+    \PackageError{eqexam}{The optional argument for
+    \string\nQuesInExam\MessageBreak must be specified}{}\fi\fi
+        \csname#1nQuestions\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+% Make this definition for \texttt{hyperref}, so its anchors will be unique.  Useful
+% when there are multiple parts of the test.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\hyper@anchor\@undefined\else
+    \renewcommand\theHeqquestionnoi
+            {\curr@quiz.\theeqquestionnoi\eqe@fpmrk}
+    \renewcommand\theHquizno{%
+        \if\probstar*\curr@quiz.%
+            \theeqquestionnoi.part\thepartno.\arabic{quizno}%
+        \else
+            \curr@quiz.%
+                \theeqquestionnoi.\arabic{quizno}%
+        \fi
+    }
+    \renewcommand\theHpartno{\curr@quiz.%
+        \theeqquestionnoi.part\thepartno}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{eqComments}
+% Often, I want to make additional instructions between problems, you can use
+% this comment environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\beforeCommentSkip}{1.25ex}
+\newcommand{\afterCommentSkip}{-1ex}
+\newcommand\hCommSpace{\ }
+\newcommand\styleComm{\bfseries}
+\newenvironment{eqComments}[1][\strut]{\removelastskip
+    \def\eqe@argi{#1}\def\eqe@Strut{\strut}\def\hsc{\styleComm}%
+    \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+    {\beforeCommentSkip\space\@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+    {\afterCommentSkip}{\normalfont\normalsize\styleComm}*%
+    {\textcolor{\@eqCommentsColor}{#1}}%
+    \ifx\eqe@argi\eqe@Strut\hskip\afterCommentSkip
+    \else\ifx\eqe@argi\@empty\hskip\afterCommentSkip\else
+    \hsc\strut\fi\fi\normalfont\normalsize
+    \color{\@eqCommentsColorBody}\ignorespaces
+}{\par\vskip\beforeCommentSkip\space\@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+% \subsection{The \texttt{exam} Environment}
+% Each part of the exam is enclosed in an \texttt{exam} environment. The environment is
+% a customized version of the \texttt{shortquiz} environment.
+%    \begin{macro}{\exambegdef}
+% Some definitions that are executed at the beginning of each exam environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tb@beginexam@code\relax
+\def\partialspillovertotals{0}
+\def\exambegdef
+{%
+    \csname\thisexamlabel pagemark\endcsname
+    \@ifundefined{partialtotalpg}{}{%
+        \ifnum\partialtotalpg=\arabic{page}%
+            {\count0=\partialspillovertotals
+             \advance\count0by\partialtotaleoe
+             \xdef\partialspillovertotals{\the\count0}%
+             \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+                {Page\partialtotalpg spilltotal}{\partialtotaleoe}}%
+            }%
+        \fi
+    }%
+    \csarg\ifx{\thisexamlabel pageno}\relax
+    \else
+        \csarg\ifx{pagenofirstprob\thisexamlabel}\relax
+        \else
+            \csarg\ifnum{\thisexamlabel pageno}
+                < \@nameuse{pagenofirstprob\thisexamlabel}%
+            \else
+                \csarg\ifx{\thisexamlabel pagemark}\relax
+                \else
+                    \ifnum\value{page}=%
+                        \csname\thisexamlabel pageno\endcsname
+                        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+                            {\thisexamlabel pagemark}{\string\newpage}}%
+                    \fi
+                \fi
+            \fi
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \setcounter{eqquestionnoi}{0}\setcounter{eqpointvalue}{0}%
+    \setcounter{eqpointsofar}{0}\setcounter{eqpointsthispage}{0}%
+    \setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We wrote \verb!\begin{eqequestions}! to the top of the solutions file (\cs{jobname.sol}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \writeBeginEqeQuestions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \label{\thisexamlabel PageBegin}%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string\gdef
+    {\thisexamlabel pageno}{\thepage}}%
+%    \let\sq@priorhook\@empty
+    \ifeqfortextbook
+        \global\examenvtrue\tb@beginexam@code
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\examenddef}
+% Some definitions that are executed at the end of each exam environment.
+% We place a totals box to report the total since the last page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tb@insmargmark{\ifisinstred\ifismarginans
+    \insMidMarg{\mark{}}\fi\fi}
+\def\eqe@adjForSepRule{\if\eq@parttotals\eqe@YES
+    \eq@pointboxtotalheight\halfHtPtBox\relax
+    \advance\eq@pointboxtotalheight\dpPtBox\relax
+    \advance\eq@pointboxtotalheight\pointsmarginparpush
+    \vspace*{\eq@pointboxtotalheight}\fi}
+\def\eqe@afterexamsepcode{% dps7
+    \if\eq@parttotals\eqe@YES
+        \@actionsAtPageBreak{\global\let\@spacetobreak1}%
+            {\global\let\@spacetobreak0}%
+        \ifx\@spacetobreak0\relax
+            \bgroup\@tempdima=\pagetotal
+            \advance\@tempdima\eq@pointboxtotalheight
+            \ifdim\@tempdima>\pagegoal\aftergroup\newpage
+            \else\ifnum\arabic{eq@count}>0\relax
+                \removelastskip\vskip6pt\kern0pt %dps7
+                \if\@reportpoints\eqe@One\else\@checkSpacing{0}\fi
+                    \textcolor{\endexamtotal@color}%
+                    {\eqeomarginbox{\arabic{eq@count}}{0}}\fi
+                \ifx\eqx@separationrule\eqe@YES
+                    \separationrule\eqe@adjForSepRule\fi
+            \fi\egroup
+        \fi
+    \else\ifx\eqx@separationrule\eqe@YES
+        \separationrule\eqe@adjForSepRule\fi
+    \fi
+}
+\def\examenddef
+{%
+    \global\let\partialtotaleoe\relax
+    \global\let\partialtotalpg\relax
+    \global\let\afterexamsepcode\relax
+    \csarg\ifx{NumberOfParts}\relax
+    \else
+        \ifnum\value{eq@numparts}<\NumberOfParts
+            \setcounter{eq@count}{\value{eqpointvalue}}%
+            \addtocounter{eq@count}{-\value{eqpointsofar}}%
+            \xdef\partialtotaleoe{\arabic{eq@count}}%
+            \xdef\partialtotalpg{\arabic{page}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% See if there is enough room at the bottom of the page to place the end of exam
+% totals and to start a new exam, if any. If not, forget it, and start a new page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \global\let\afterexamsepcode\eqe@afterexamsepcode % dps7
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifeqfortextbook\global\examenvfalse\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2011/05/08) Just before the file is closed and input, we write the end
+% of the \texttt{eqequestions} environment, \verb!\end{eqequestions}!.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \writeEndEqeQuestions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \writetotalstoaux
+    \addtocounter{page}{-1}%
+    \writelastpage[\thisexamlabel]\addtocounter{page}{1}%
+    \ifeqfortextbook\tb@insmargmark\fi
+}
+\def\@actionsAtPageBreak#1#2{%
+    \bgroup\@tempdima\pagegoal\advance\@tempdima-\pagetotal
+    \@tempdimb\@fvsizeskip\vsize
+    \ifdim\@tempdima < \@tempdimb #1\else #2\fi\egroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\separationrule}
+% For an exam with multiple parts, a separation rule is created, unless absorbed
+% into a page break. The command \cs{separationrule} defines this separation rule,
+% it can be redefined as desired.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{2007/12/10}
+%{
+%   Added \cs{separationrule} so user's can redesign the separation rule
+%   that is created between two parts of an exam.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\separationrule}{\makebox[\linewidth-\eqemargin][c]%
+    {\rule{.67\linewidth}{.4pt}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% (2011/05/08) This is a new environment that makes an exam into a list of problems.
+% This is an attempt to expand the use of \textsf{eqexam} to {\LaTeX}
+% documents. We give control over the page layout so an eqexam document
+% can be used within a textbook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@hspannerPrb{\ }
+\@ifundefined{ifwithsoldoc}{\newif\ifwithsoldoc\withsoldocfalse}{}
+\newcommand{\eqequestopsep}[1]{\def\eqeques@topsep{#1}}
+\providecommand{\eqequesparsep}[1]{\def\eqeques@parsep{#1}}
+\newcommand{\eqequesitemsep}[1]{\def\eqeques@itemsep{#1}}
+\newcommand{\eqequeslistparindent}[1]{\def\eqeques@listparindent{#1}}
+\eqequestopsep{0pt}
+\eqequesparsep{0pt}
+\eqequesitemsep{0pt}
+\eqequeslistparindent{0pt}
+\newif\iffirstitem
+\def\eqeSolnItemMngt{\iffirstitem\global\firstitemfalse
+    \let\eqe@next\@empty\else\let\eqe@next\item\fi\eqe@next\relax}
+\newenvironment{eqequestions}{%
+    \begin{list}{}{%
+    \ifwithsoldoc\let\solnItemMngt\eqeSolnItemMngt\fi
+    \setlength{\labelwidth}{\eqemargin}%
+    \setlength{\parsep}{\eqeques@parsep}%
+    \setlength{\itemsep}{\eqeques@itemsep}%
+    \setlength{\topsep}{\eqeques@topsep}%
+    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\listparindent}{\eqeques@listparindent}%dps%
+    \ifwithsoldoc\settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@hspannerSoln}\else
+    \settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@hspannerPrb}\fi
+    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+    }\ifwithsoldoc\global\firstitemtrue\fi\item\relax}{\end{list}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{exam}
+% Each part of the exam is enclosed in an \texttt{exam} environment. The one
+% required parameter is the name of the part, for example, `Part1', `Part2'.
+% These should be one word, no white spaces, just letters and possibly numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setDefaultfvsizeskip#1{\def\default@fvsizeskip{#1}%
+    \def\@fvsizeskip{#1}}
+\def\default@fvsizeskip{.3}
+\edef\@fvsizeskip{\default@fvsizeskip}
+\newcommand{\fvsizeskip}[1]{\def\@fvsizeskip{#1}}
+\def\autoExamName{exam\the\value{eq@numparts}}
+\def\nNumberOfP@rts{\csname NumberOfParts\endcsname}
+\abovesqskip{}
+\let\eqeWrtExamTitleToSolns\eqe@YES
+\def\wrtExamTitleInSolns{\let\eqeWrtExamTitleToSolns\eqe@YES}
+\def\noExamTitleInSolns{\let\eqeWrtExamTitleToSolns\eqe@NO}
+\let\thisexamlabel\@empty
+\let\isInExamEnv\eqe@NO
+\newenvironment{exam}[2][]
+{%
+    \makeRoomForProb{\@fvsizeskip\textheight}{0}%
+    \let\isInExamEnv\eqe@YES
+    \stepcounter{eq@numparts}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \texttt{\#2} is empty, use \cs{autoExamName}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\eqexamargii{#2}\ifx\eqexamargii\@empty
+        \edef\eqexamargii{\autoExamName}\fi
+    \xdef\thisexamlabel{\eqexamargii}\xdef\curr@quiz{\eqexamargii}%
+    \def\eqexamargi{#1}\ifx\eqexamargi\@empty
+        \edef\eqexamargi{\eqexamargii}\fi
+    \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\thisUFexamlabel
+    \expandafter{\eqexamargi}%
+    \edef\eq@tmp{\the\partNames\string\\{\eqexamargii}}%
+    \global\partNames=\expandafter{\eq@tmp}%
+    \csarg\ifx{NumberOfParts}\relax\else
+\ifx\eqeWrtExamTitleToSolns\eqe@YES
+    \ifnum\nNumberOfP@rts=1\relax\else
+    \def\eqe@argi{#1}\ifx\eqe@argi\@empty
+        \eqe@writetoSolns{\eqexamargii}\eqe@writetoAux{\string
+            \csarg\string\gdef{userFriendly\eqexamargii}{\eqexamargii}}
+        \else
+        \eqe@writetoSolns{#1}\eqe@writetoAux{\string
+            \csarg\string\gdef{userFriendly#2}{#1}}
+        \fi
+    \fi\fi
+\fi
+    \exambegdef
+    \edef\temp@Exp{\noexpand\shortquiz\sqstar[\eqexamargii]}\temp@Exp
+%    \expandafter\shortquiz\sqstar[\eqexamargii]%
+}{%
+    \examenddef
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v4.4}{2015/05/24}{Finish with a \cs{vskip} to clear the last
+% item or problem.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \vskip\eqeques@parsep\relax\kern0pt %dps88
+    \endshortquiz
+    \aftergroup\afterexamsepcode % dps7
+    \par\penalty-100\vskip0pt
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \begin{macro}{\EQEcalculateAllTotals}
+% (4/22/11) Added the command \cs{EQEcalculateAllTotals}. The command is executed
+% as part of the \cs{maketitle} command. If \cs{maketitle} is not used for some reason
+% \cs{EQEcalculateAllTotals} can be executed just after \verb~\begin{document}~.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\EQEcalculateAllTotals}{%
+    \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We calculate the grand total of all the parts of the \texttt{exam} environments,
+% and we define \cs{eqeGrandTotal}, which contains the total.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \count\z@=0\relax
+        \def\\##1{\csarg\ifx{##1total}\relax\else
+            \advance\count\z@\csname##1total\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{thePartNames} list all named exam environments in the document, e.g.,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%   \\{Part1}\\{Part2}...\\{LastPart}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \fi}\csname thePartNames\endcsname
+        \xdef\eqeGrandTotal{\the\count\z@}%
+        \ifnum\eqeGrandTotal=0 \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If there is a nonzero grandtotal, we move on to calculate
+% the percentages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \def\\##1{\eqe@calc@percent{##1}}%
+        \csname thePartNames\endcsname\fi
+    \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqe@calc@percent}
+% We go through the parts listed in \cs{thePartNames} and create a
+% calculation of the percentage for that part, and leave it in
+% \verb!\csname#1percent\endcsname!, which can be accessed
+% through the \cs{percentForPart} command, for example
+% \verb!\percentForPart{<part_name>}! might expand to \texttt{45.6\%}.
+%    \begin{macro}{\nPctDecPts}
+% The number of decimal points to carry in the representation of the
+% percentage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\nPctDecPts}{1}
+\def\eqe@calc@percent#1{\@ifundefined{#1total}{%
+        \csarg\gdef{#1percent}{??}}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \textsf{fp} package is not loaded, we use register arithmetic,
+% percentages are truncated to integers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \csarg\ifx{FPdiv}\relax
+        \count2=\tot@lForPart{#1}%
+        \edef\expGT{\csname eqeGrandTotal\endcsname}%
+        \multiply\count2by100\relax\divide\count2by\expGT\relax
+        \csarg\xdef{#1percent}{\the\count2 }\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \textsf{fp} package is loaded, we use this package to calculate
+% the percentage, accurate to one decimal place.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \FPdiv{\eqe@pForPart}{\csname#1total\endcsname}%
+            {\csname eqeGrandTotal\endcsname}%
+        \FPmul{\eqe@pForPart}{\eqe@pForPart}{100}%
+        \FPround{\eqe@pForPart}{\eqe@pForPart}{\nPctDecPts}%
+        \csarg\xdef{#1percent}{\eqe@pForPart}\fi
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\writetotalstoaux{\eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+        \csarg\string\gdef{\thisexamlabel total}{\theeqpointvalue}}%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg
+        \string\gdef{\thisexamlabel nQuestions}{\theeqquestionnoi}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\writelastpage}[1][]{\def\eqe@argi{#1}%
+   \ifx\eqe@argi\@empty\else\label{#1PageEnd}\fi
+   \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg
+        \string\gdef{eqExamLastPage}{\arabic{page}}}%
+}
+\def\exlabel{}
+\def\sqlabel{}
+\def\exsolafter{\textit{Solution}:}
+\def\sqsolafter{\textit{Solution}:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The exercise labels in the body of the text. (2015/02/27) changed
+% the command \cs{exlabelformatwp} to incorporate other parameters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\exlabelformat{\textbf{\theeqquestionnoi.\ }}
+\def\exlabelformat{\textbf{%
+    \theeqquestionnoi\eqe@decPointPrb\eqe@hspannerPrb}}
+\def\exlabelformatwp{\exlabelformat}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The exercise labels for solutions at the end of the document
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\exsllabelformat
+    {\string\makebox[0pt][r]{\string\textbf{%
+        \theeqquestionnoi\eqe@decPointPrb\eqe@hspannerSoln}}}
+\def\exsllabelformatwp
+     {\string\makebox[0pt][r]{\string\textbf{%
+        \theeqquestionnoi\eqe@decPointPrb\eqe@hspannerSoln}}%
+        (\thepartno)\eqe@hspannerSoln}
+\ifanswerkey
+    \def\exrtnlabelformat{}
+    \def\exrtnlabelformatwp{}
+    \def\eq@sqslrtnlabel{}
+\else
+    \def\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+    \def\exrtnlabelformatwp{$\square$}
+    \def\eq@sqslrtnlabel{$\square$}
+\fi
+\def\sqslrtnlabel{\eq@sqslrtnlabel}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2010/08/21) Enable some localizations of strings
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\exsectitletext}{Solutions to \webtitle}
+\def\exsectitle{\normalsize\exsectitletext}
+%\def\exsectitle{\normalsize\hspace*
+%    {-\oddsidemargin}\exsectitletext}
+\@ifpackageloaded{exerquiz}{%{Solutions to \websubject}
+    \renewcommand{\exsecrunhead}{}}{\newcommand{\exsecrunhead}{}}
+%\providecommand{\exsecrunhead}{Solutions to \websubject}%
+\def\eq@sqslsectitle{}
+\def\eq@sqslsecrunhead{}
+\def\eq@sqsllabel{{\string\llap{\string\textbf{\theeqquestionnoi.\ }}}}
+\def\eq@sqlabel{}
+\let\include@quizsolutions\relax
+\let\solnhspace\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{\texttt{problem} Environments}
+% A single question is posed with the \texttt{problem} environment, and a question with
+% multiple parts with the \texttt{problem*} environment.
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillin}
+% This macro is used for fill-in type questions. The first argument is the length
+% of the underline blank to leave to fill-in, the second argument is the correct answer.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\optsFillIn}[1]{\def\eqe@optsFillIn{#1}}
+\let\eqe@optsFillIn\@empty
+\newcommand{\fillin}[3][u]{%
+    \ifx#1u\let\@fillinFmt\underbar
+    \else\ifx#1b\let\@fillinFmt\relax
+    \else\let\@fillinFmt\relax\fi\fi
+    \ifeq@proofing
+        \@fillinFmt{\makebox[#2]{%
+            \strut\hfil\bfseries\color{red}#3\hfil}}%
+    \else
+        \@fillinFmt{\makebox[#2]{\strut\hfil}}%
+        \@ifundefined{@quiz}{}{%
+            \if\eq@online\eqe@YES\relax
+                \ifeq@nosolutions
+                    \ifeq@solutionsafter\else
+                        \ifx\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@YES\relax
+                            \stepcounter{@cntfillin}%
+                            \edef\fieldName{%
+                                \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.fillin.%
+                                    \theeqquestionnoi.part\thepartno.%
+                                    fi\the@cntfillin%
+                                \else
+                                    eqexam.\curr@quiz.fillin.%
+                                    \theeqquestionnoi.fi\the@cntfillin%
+                                \fi
+                            }\makebox[0pt][r]{\textField[\BC{}
+                                \presets{\eqe@optsFillIn}]{%
+                                \fieldName}{#2}{11bp}}%
+                        \fi
+                    \fi
+                \fi
+            \fi
+        }%
+    \fi\space\ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\TF}
+% A specialized version of \cs{fillin} for True/False questions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\defaultTFwidth{30pt}
+\newcommand\TF[2][\defaultTFwidth]{%
+    \def\eqe@next{\fillin{#1}{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\eq@extralabelsep=0pt\relax\else
+        \if\probstar*\relax\if\exerwparts@cols0
+            \def\eqe@next{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+                \fillin{#1}{#2}}\ignorespaces}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+\eqe@next}
+\def\fillinWidth#1{%
+    \if\probstar*
+        \settowidth{\eq@tmplengthA}{\normalfont\ }%
+        \addtolength{\eq@tmplengthA}{#1}%
+        \edef\eq@extralabelsep{\the\eq@tmplengthA}%
+    \fi
+}
+\let\fillInFormatDefault\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\Do<num>}
+% The following commands supports the optional argument \texttt{{\string\Do<num>}}.
+% When I teach senior or graduate-level classes, I often give a problem with
+% multiple parts (each of equal value) and ask them to ``do 3 of the following 5''
+% parts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@DoWarning#1{\PackageWarning{eqexam}{\string#1\space
+    requires the first argument\MessageBreak of problem* to be <num>ea}}
+\def\eqe@DoNum{\textbf{??}\eqe@DoWarning{\DoNum}}
+\def\eqe@nDoNum{\textbf{??}\eqe@DoWarning{\nDoNum}}
+\let\DoNum\eqe@DoNum
+\let\nDoNum\eqe@nDoNum
+\def\makeDoNum#1{\xdef\nDoNum{#1}%
+    \def\ifc@sewrap{\ifcase#1??\or}%
+    \xdef\DoNum{\expandafter\ifc@sewrap\eqe@wordNums\else
+    \eqe@wordNumbsError\fi}}
+\def\makeOutOfNum#1{\xdef\nOutOfNum{#1}%
+    \def\ifc@sewrap{\ifcase#1??\or}%
+    \xdef\OutOfNum{\expandafter\ifc@sewrap\eqe@wordNums\else
+    \eqe@wordNumbsError\fi}}
+\def\eqe@OutOfNum{\textbf{??}\eqe@DoWarning{\OutOfNum}}
+\def\eqe@nOutOfNum{\textbf{??}\eqe@DoWarning{\nOutOfNum}}
+\let\OutOfNum\eqe@OutOfNum
+\let\nOutOfNum\eqe@nOutOfNum
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\eqe@wordNums} is used to typeset the English word for
+% the numbers (1--10). This command may be redefined to other languages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqe@wordNums}{one\or two\or three\or
+    four\or five\or six\or seven\or eight\or nine\or ten}
+\newcommand{\eqe@wordNumbsError}{\noexpand\PackageError{eqexam}%
+    {Number out of range, 1--10}%
+    {Use a smaller number, or redefine the command
+    \string\eqe@wordNums.}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeRoomForProb#1#2{\par %\endgraf % dps 11/11/10
+    \bgroup\@nobreakfalse\addpenalty{-500}%
+    \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
+    \@tempdima \pagegoal \advance \@tempdima -\pagetotal
+    \ifdim \@tempdima<\@tempdimb\ifnum\col@number>\@ne\columnbreak
+        \else\newpage\fi\fi\egroup
+    \ifnum\@reportpoints>1
+        \ifx\eqe@prevProbZero\eqe@YES
+            \if\eqe@isPts0\else\vskip-\halfHtPtBox\relax\fi
+        \else
+            \ifl@stDispl@yPoints
+            \if\eqe@isPts0\@checkSpacing{1}\else
+               \if#21 \@checkSpacing{0}\fi
+            \fi\fi
+        \fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\emitMessageNearBottom}
+%    The syntax for this command is
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%   \emitMessageNearBottom*[vspace]{msg}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    If there is less than \texttt{vspace} remaining on the page, a message,
+%    \texttt{msg}, is emitted. Then the optional \texttt{*} appears, a
+%    \cs{newpage} is also emitted just after the \texttt{msg} and
+%    \cs{insertContAnnot} is expanded just after \cs{newpage}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\emitMessageNearBottom}{\@ifstar
+        {\def\eqe@emnb{\ifnum\col@number>\@ne\columnbreak
+            \else\newpage\fi\insertContAnnot}\eq@emitMessageNearBottom}
+        {\let\eqe@emnb\relax\eq@emitMessageNearBottom}}
+\newcommand{\eq@emitMessageNearBottom}[2][\iacvspace]{%
+    \eq@@emitMessageNearBottom{#1}{#2}}
+\def\eq@@emitMessageNearBottom#1#2{\par
+    \bgroup\@nobreakfalse\addpenalty{-500}%
+    \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
+    \@tempdima \pagegoal \advance \@tempdima -\pagetotal
+    \ifdim \@tempdima<\@tempdimb #2 \eqe@emnb\fi\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \DescribeMacro{\getSpaceLeftOnPage}\cmd{\getSpaceLeftOnPage} calculates
+%    the amount of space left on the current page. It saves the calculation
+%    in the text macro \DescribeMacro{\amtSpaceOnLeftOnPage}\cmd{\amtSpaceOnLeftOnPage}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\getSpaceLeftOnPage}{\par\bgroup
+    \@tempdima \pagegoal \advance \@tempdima -\pagetotal
+    \xdef\amtSpaceOnLeftOnPage{\the\@tempdima}\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\promoteNewPage}
+%\changes{v2.0n}{2011/05/13}{%
+% A simple variation on \cs{makeRoomForProb} designed for user use.
+%}
+% A simple variation on \cs{makeRoomForProb} designed for user use.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pnpDflt}{\@fvsizeskip\textheight}
+\newcommand{\promoteNewPage}[1][\pnpDflt]{%
+    \makeRoomForProb{#1}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    Used in \cmd{\makeRoomForProb} and elsewhere. \DescribeMacro{\pointsmarginparpush}
+%    \cs{pointsmarginparpush} adds a little more separation between point
+%    boxes. \DescribeMacro{\@checkSpacing}\cmd{\@checkSpacing} is the algorithm
+%    for adjusting the vertical spaces between problems when points are on the
+%    right.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pointsmarginparpush{3pt}
+\def\@checkSpacing#1{\bgroup\ifinner\else
+    \@tempdima\lastPageTotal
+    \@tempdimb\pagetotal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{lastPageTotal} is less than \cs{pagetotal}, continue
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifdim\@tempdima < \@tempdimb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Compute \texttt{\cs{pagetotal} - \cs{lastPageTotal}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \advance\@tempdimb by-\@tempdima
+        \ifdim\@tempdimb < \eq@pointboxtotalheight
+        \if#11%
+            \eq@pointboxtotalheight\halfHtPtBox\relax
+            \advance\eq@pointboxtotalheight\dpPtBox\relax
+        \fi
+            \@tempdima=\eq@pointboxtotalheight
+            \advance\@tempdima\pointsmarginparpush\relax
+            \advance\@tempdima by-\@tempdimb
+            \vspace*{\@tempdima}%
+         \fi
+    \fi\fi
+\egroup}
+\def\@checkSpacingi{\bgroup
+    \@tempdima = \lastPageTotal
+    \@tempdimb = \pagetotal
+    \ifdim\@tempdima < \@tempdimb
+        \advance\@tempdimb by-\@tempdima
+        \eq@pointboxtotalheight\halfHtPtBox\relax
+        \advance\eq@pointboxtotalheight\dpPtBox\relax
+        \ifdim\@tempdimb < \eq@pointboxtotalheight
+            \@tempdima=\eq@pointboxtotalheight
+            \advance\@tempdima\pointsmarginparpush\relax
+            \advance\@tempdima by-\@tempdimb
+            \vspace*{\@tempdima}%
+         \fi
+    \fi
+\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\default@nbaselineskip} is the default number of \cs{baselineskip}s needed to place
+% a new problem. While \DescribeMacro{\nbaselineskip}\cmd{\nbaselineskip} is the number
+% of \cs{baselineskip}s needed for a new \texttt{problem} (or \texttt{problem*}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setDefaultnbaselineskip}[1]{\def\default@nbaselineskip{#1}}
+\setDefaultnbaselineskip{6}
+\def\nbaselineskip#1{\def\@nbaselineskip{#1}}
+\def\nbaselineskipReset{\edef\@nbaselineskip{\default@nbaselineskip}}
+\nbaselineskipReset
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{problem}
+% The \texttt{problem} is used to pose a single---non-multi-part---question.
+% The optional argument is the number of points for this problem.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@gobbletoend#1\end{}
+\def\eqe@grabarg#1\end{\def\numpoints{#1}}
+\def\eqe@isPts{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We reset some \textsf{exerquiz} parameters for \textsf{eqexam}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\aboveexskip{3pt}\belowexskip{3pt}
+\partstopsep{3pt}\partsitemsep{3pt}\partsparsep{0pt}
+\rowsepDefault{3pt}\partstabcolsep{1.5pt}%
+\partstabtopsep{3pt}\partstabrowsep{3pt}
+\renewcommand\belowexsolnskip{{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \textsf{problem} environment now begins.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\isProbEnv\eqe@NO
+\let\topofprobhook\relax
+\newenvironment{problem}[1][]{\let\isProbEnv\eqe@YES
+    \if\eqe@isPts0\global\let\eqe@prevProbZero\eqe@YES\else
+        \global\let\eqe@prevProbZero\eqe@NO\fi
+    \global\thereissolutionfalse
+    \def\numpointsEmpty{0}\def\numpoints{#1}%
+    \ifx\numpoints\@empty\def\numpoints{0}\def\numpointsEmpty{1}%
+        \gdef\eqe@isPts{0}\else\gdef\eqe@isPts{1}\fi
+    \makeRoomForProb{\@nbaselineskip\baselineskip}{\eqe@isPts}%
+    \gdef\probstar{x}\let\afterlabelhskip\@empty
+    \ifx\marginpoints\@empty\else %\def\numpoints{#1}%
+        \if\numpointsEmpty\eqe@One\let\marginpoints\@gobbletwo\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.0n}{2011/05/13}{%
+% Added \texttt{*<num>} to signal in-line display of points.
+%}
+% (2011/5/13) We add a \texttt{*} feature. When the author types
+% \texttt{[*3]}, it is a three point problem, but the value is expressed
+% in-line, not in the margins.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifstar{\let\@isitstar\eqe@One\eqe@grabarg}%
+            {\let\@isitstar\eqe@Zero\eqe@gobbletoend}#1\end
+        \if\@isitstar\eqe@One\addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\numpoints}%
+            \@marktotalvalue
+            \ifdispl@yPoints
+            \def\marginparafterhook{\PTs{\numpoints}\space}\else
+            \def\marginparafterhook{\PTs*{\numpoints}\space}\fi\else
+            \def\marginparpriorhook{\noindent
+                \probvalue{\numpoints}{0}}\fi
+    \fi\setcounter{eq@count}{\value{eqquestionnoi}}%
+    \addtocounter{eq@count}{1}%
+    \ifnum\value{eq@count}=1\relax
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+            \csarg\string\gdef{pagenofirstprob\thisexamlabel}{\thepage}}%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{}{2015/06/01}{Added the hook \cs{topofprobstarhook}}
+% \DescribeMacro\topofprobhook is a general purpose hook at the top of the
+% \texttt{problem} environment, before the beginning of the nested
+% \texttt{eqequestions} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \topofprobhook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.1e}{2012/11/10}{Removed hard-wired \cs{proofingsymbol}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \proofingsymbol{\ding{52}}%
+    \begin{eqequestions}%
+    \begin{exercise}[eqquestionnoi]%
+}{\end{exercise}%
+  \end{eqequestions}%
+    \ifeqlocalversion\ifeqglobalversion
+        \xdef\eqe@tmp{\noexpand\forVersion{\eq@selectedVersion}}%
+        \aftergroup\eqe@tmp
+    \fi\fi
+    \global\eqlocalversionfalse
+    \ifdispl@yPoints\global\l@stDispl@yPointstrue
+    \else\global\l@stDispl@yPointsfalse\fi
+    \global\let\eqe@fpmrk\@empty
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \begin{macro}{\PTs}
+%    \begin{macro}{\itemPTsTxt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\itemPTsFormated}
+%  When you specify \cs{auto} for the optional argument of the \texttt{problem*}
+%  environment, when each item must have the command \cs{PTs} to assign the
+%  value of that question.  The \cs{PTs} has one optional star-parameter, and one
+%  required parameter. The required parameter is the number of points for this item,
+%  if the \texttt{*} is specified, then the point value is not typeset in the document.
+%
+%  The command \cs{itemPTsTxt} has one argument, the number of points for this item. This
+%  argument is passed from the \cs{PTs} command.  You can redefine the way the points appear
+%  in the document using \cs{itemPTsTxt}.  As separate command \cs{itemPTsFormated} is used to
+%  put parentheses around \cs{itemPTsTxt}. If the \texttt{*} option is taken with \cs{PTs}, then
+%  you are free to place \cs{itemPTsTxt} anywhere in the problem statement.
+% \changes{v1.6g}{2006/11/29}
+%{
+% Added \cs{itemPTsTxt} and \cs{itemPTsFormated} to work with \cs{PTs}.
+% Also added a \texttt{*} option, to \cs{PTs}, in this case the points
+% are not typeset.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\itemPTsTxt[1]{$\eqe@ptsFmt{#1}\,\text{%
+    \ifnum#1=1\relax\eqptLabel\else\eqptsLabel\fi}$}
+\newcommand\itemPTsEaTxt[1]{$\eqe@ptsFmt{#1}\,\text{%
+    \ifnum#1=1\relax\eqptLabel\else\eqptsLabel\fi\space\eqeachLabel}$}
+\newcommand{\itemPTsFormated}[1]{(#1)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2013/12/04) Added \DescribeMacro{\obeyPTsStar}\cmd{\obeyPTsStar} and
+% \DescribeMacro{\ignorePTsStar}\cmd{\ignorePTsStar}. The former is the default.
+% if \cmd{\ignorePTsStar} is in effect, \cs{PTs*} is treated as \cs{PTs}. Useful
+% for assigning points to parts of a question, but not explicitly telling the student.
+% when you compile for the key (with \texttt{answerkey} option), you can include
+% \cmd{\ignorePTsStar} so the instructor can see the assigned points for each part.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifObeyPTsStar \ObeyPTsStartrue
+\def\obeyPTsStar{\global\ObeyPTsStartrue}
+\def\ignorePTsStar{\global\ObeyPTsStarfalse}
+\def\PTs{\leavevmode\@ifstar{\@PTs{*}}{\@PTs{x}}}
+\def\@PTs#1#2{%
+    \if\@reportpoints\eqe@Zero\ignorespaces\else
+        \if\eqe@pointsPartsId\eqe@One
+        \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{#2}\@marktotalvalue
+        \addtocounter{eq@count}{#2}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \DescribeMacro{\ignorePTsStar}\cmd{\ignorePTsStar} is in effect
+% (\cmd{\ObeyPTsStarfalse}), we gobble
+% the \cs{else} and let the code flow through.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \if#1*\ifObeyPTsStar\ignorespaces\else\expandafter\@gobble\fi
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    (2012/04/26) Wrapped |\itemPTsFormated{\itemPTsTxt{#2}}| as the argument
+%    of \cs{eqe@movePTs}. \cs{eqe@movePTs} does nothing by default, but may be
+%    redefined, for example, to place the value of each part on the margin.
+%    The default definition of \cs{eqe@movePTs} follows.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \eqe@movePTs{\itemPTsFormated{\itemPTsTxt{#2}}}\fi
+    \fi
+}
+\def\eqe@movePTs#1{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\Do<num>} The \cs{isItD@} tests to see if the next token
+% is \cs{Do}, if yes, it marks it and calls \cs{y@st@Do}, which gets the argument
+% if the \cs{Do} token.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\auto\relax
+\def\isItD@{\@ifnextchar\Do{\let\yest@D@\eqe@YES\y@st@Do}
+    {\let\yest@D@\eqe@NO\@gobblet@end}}
+\let\yest@D@\eqe@NO
+\let\D@Num\@empty
+\def\y@st@Do\Do#1\end{\gdef\D@Num{#1}}
+\def\@gobblet@end#1\end{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Test the argument to see if it is the \cs{auto} token
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\is@uto#1\auto#2\@nil{\def\eqe@argi{#1}\def\eqe@argii{#2}%
+    \ifx\eqe@argii\@empty\let\isit@uto\eqe@Zero\else
+        \let\isit@uto\eqe@One\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{environment}{problem*}
+%
+% The \texttt{problem*} environment is used to pose a multi-part question.
+% The \texttt{parts} environment is used to enumerate the parts.
+%\changes{v2.0c}{2011/01/11}{%
+%    Changed \cs{@next} to \cs{eqe@next}. There was conflict in
+%    the use of this command with one of the float environments. When user
+%    used the table environment inside the problem* environment, the
+%    compiled stopped because \cs{@next} was overwritten.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We create a Id for the points specified by the first (and second) optional parameters:
+% 0 (total points specified); 1 (\cs{auto} specified); 2 (points each
+% specified); 4 (\cs{Do} second optional parameter); a value of \cs{relax} means
+% no points specified (the default).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eqe@pointsPartsId\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leadinitemWarningStar{\PackageWarning{eqexam}
+    {Using the star (*) in front of the points\MessageBreak
+     designator is not allowed when there is a
+     \MessageBreak\string\leadinitem}}
+\def\tableadinWarningStar{\PackageWarning{eqexam}
+    {Using the star (*) in front of the points\MessageBreak
+     designator is not allowed when there is a
+     \MessageBreak\string\tableadin}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We now begin the code for the \texttt{problem*} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\isProbStarEnv\eqe@NO
+\let\topofprobstarhook\relax
+\csarg\def{problem*}{\let\isProbEnv\eqe@YES
+    \let\isProbStarEnv\eqe@YES
+    \global\thereissolutionfalse
+    \@ifnextchar[{\pr@bl@m@star}{\pr@bl@m@star[]}}
+\def\pr@bl@m@star[#1]{%
+    \@ifnextchar[{\pr@blem@star{#1}}{\pr@blem@star{#1}[]}}
+\def\pr@blem@star#1[#2]{%
+    \if\eqe@isPts0\global\let\eqe@prevProbZero\eqe@YES\else
+        \global\let\eqe@prevProbZero\eqe@NO\fi
+    \def\numpoints{#1}\ifx\numpoints\@empty
+        \gdef\eqe@isPts{0}\else\gdef\eqe@isPts{1}\fi
+    \makeRoomForProb{\@nbaselineskip\baselineskip}{\eqe@isPts}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Let the \cs{Do} commands to internal versions
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\DoNum\eqe@DoNum\let\nDoNum\eqe@nDoNum
+    \let\OutOfNum\eqe@OutOfNum\let\nOutOfNum\eqe@nOutOfNum
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.1e}{2012/11/10}{Removed hard-wired \cs{proofingsymbol}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \proofingsymbol{\ding{52}}%
+    \gdef\probstar{*}%
+    \gdef\pr@b@secondarg{#2}\setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+    \let\afterlabelhskip\@empty
+    \global\let\probpointseach\@empty\def\numpoints{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine if the argument begins with \texttt{*}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifstar{\let\@isitstar\eqe@One\eqe@grabarg}%
+        {\let\@isitstar\eqe@Zero\eqe@gobbletoend}#1\end
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If this \texttt{problem*} environment has a \cs{leadinitem}, the \texttt{*}
+% option is not allowed
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if\@isitstar\eqe@One
+        \@tempcnta=\theeqquestionnoi\relax
+        \advance\@tempcnta1\relax
+        \@ifundefined{leadinitem\thisexamlabel-\the\@tempcnta}{}
+            {\leadinitemWarningStar\let\@isitstar\eqe@Zero}%
+        \@ifundefined{tableadin\thisexamlabel-\the\@tempcnta}{}
+            {\tableadinWarningStar\let\@isitstar\eqe@Zero}%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check for the \cs{auto} keyword
+% \changes{v3.1a}{2012/05/21}{Using a more robust method of detecting the
+% presence of \cs{auto}}.
+% There are problems when the first two digits are the same, the old comparison
+% would say that the first parameter is \cs{auto}, which is it not. Replace
+% the old comparison with a more robust method.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\is@uto\numpoints\auto\@nil
+    \if\isit@uto\eqe@One\let\eqe@pointsPartsId\eqe@One
+        \global\let\probpointseach\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The author has requested \cs{auto}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \def\eqe@next{\autocalcparts}%
+    \else
+        \ifx\pr@b@secondarg\@empty\else
+        \let\eqe@pointsPartsId\eqe@Four
+        \isItD@#2\end\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Not \cs{auto} so either \texttt{<num>ea} or \texttt{<num>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \def\eqe@next{\manualcalcparts{\numpoints}}%
+    \fi\eqe@next
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 2012/11/30 added \cs{leadinitem} defined \texttt{eqexam.def} as a dummy command, which we
+% the \cs{let} here to \cs{eqe@leadinitem}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\leadinitem\eqe@leadinitem
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 2015/05/31 added \cs{tableadin} defined \texttt{eqexam.def} as a dummy command, which we
+% the \cs{let} here to \cs{eqe@leadinitem}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\tableadin\eqe@tableadin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{}{2015/06/01}{Added the hook \cs{topofprobstarhook}}
+% \DescribeMacro\topofprobstarhook is a general purpose hook at the top of the
+% \texttt{problem*} environment, before the beginning of the nested
+% \texttt{eqequestions} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \topofprobstarhook
+    \ifeqfortextbook
+    \writeToSolnFile{\protect\global\protect\frstProbNumShownfalse}\fi
+    \begin{eqequestions}%
+    \begin{exercise}[eqquestionnoi]*}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftb@endprobstarCks{%
+    \ifWithinANSGrp
+        \PackageError{eqexam}{\string\bGrpANS\space is still open}
+        {You need to match it with an \string\bGrpANS,
+         or remove it.}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\endproblem*} begins here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\csarg\def{endproblem*}{%
+    \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+        \csarg\string\gdef{nPartsThisProb\thisexamlabel.\theeqquestionnoi}%
+            {\arabic{partno}}}%
+    \ifx\probpointseach\@empty\else
+    \ifx\probpointseach\auto
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+            \csarg\string\gdef{prob\thisexamlabel.\theeqquestionnoi}%
+            {\theeq@count}}%
+    \else
+        \setcounter{eq@count}{\value{partno}}%
+        \ifx\pr@b@secondarg\@empty\else
+            \bgroup\toks0=\expandafter{\pr@b@secondarg}%
+            \expandafter\isItD@\the\toks0 \end
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If there is a |\Do|, we write this info to AUX.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifx\yest@D@\eqe@YES\ifx\eqe@pointsEach\eqe@YES
+                \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+                    \csarg\string\gdef{DoNumThisProb\thisexamlabel.%
+                    \theeqquestionnoi}{\D@Num}}%
+                \@tempcnta = \value{eq@count}%
+                \advance\@tempcnta -\D@Num
+                \global\advance\value{eq@count}-\@tempcnta
+% 3.0k
+                \@tempcnta=\value{partno}%
+                \advance\@tempcnta -\D@Num
+                \multiply\@tempcnta by\argi
+                \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{-\@tempcnta}%
+            \fi\fi
+            \egroup
+        \fi
+        \multiply\value{eq@count}\argi
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string
+            \csarg\string\gdef{prob\thisexamlabel.\theeqquestionnoi}%
+                {\theeq@count}}%
+    \fi\fi
+    \end{exercise}%
+    \end{eqequestions}%
+    \ifeqfortextbook\ftb@endprobstarCks\fi
+    \ifeqlocalversion\ifeqglobalversion
+        \xdef\eqe@tmp{\noexpand\forVersion{\eq@selectedVersion}}%
+        \aftergroup\eqe@tmp
+    \fi\fi
+    \global\eqlocalversionfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{}{2015/06/02}{Added \cs{@marktotalvalue} which seems to solve a problem
+% with \texttt{multicols}. Sometimes the totals are not correct, they do not `migrate' out
+% as they should.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@marktotalvalue
+    \ifdispl@yPoints\global\l@stDispl@yPointstrue
+    \else\global\l@stDispl@yPointsfalse\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \begin{macro}{\leadinitem}
+%\changes{v3.1f}{2012/11/27}{Created \cs{leadinitem} command for a lead in question
+% for the \texttt{parts*} environment.}
+% Some authors, no me among them, want to post a question with parts (\texttt{problem*}) without
+% an introductory sentence. Scandalous!
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{problem*}\relax
+%\leadinitem Prove that $4x^2\ge (x+1)^2$ for $x\ge1$.
+%\begin{solution} soln\end{solution}
+%\begin{parts}
+%\item Use the principle of mathematical induction to prove that
+%   $4^n\geq3n^2$ for all positive integers $n$.
+%\begin{solution} soln\end{solution}
+%\end{parts}
+%\end{problem*}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Below is my solution to this problem. There were changes in both \textsf{eqexam} and
+% \textsf{exerquiz} (\texttt{eqexam.def}). Here are the listing of changes for my future
+% reference.
+%\begin{itemize}
+% \item Defined \cs{eqe@leadinitem}, \cs{eqe@@leadinitem}, and \cs{leadinitem} below.
+% The first one mostly tests whether we are permitted to use the \cs{leadinitem} command.
+% If \cs{solutionparshape} is empty, the command may be used. (This gives a restriction
+% of only one use per a single \texttt{problem*} environment.) Control is passed
+% to \cs{eqe@@leadinitem} which does all the work.
+% \item In the definition of \cs{pr@blem@star} (part of the startup for \texttt{problem*} we
+% say \verb!\let\leadinitem=\eqe@leadinitem!
+% \item In the startup code for \texttt{exercise@parts@list} (\texttt{exerquiz})
+% lines containing \cs{solutionparshape} and \verb!\let\leadinitem\eq@leadinitemparts!
+% are found. Also, when the \texttt{parts} environment is complete, we restore the
+% default definition of \cs{leadinitem}, \verb!\let\leadinitem\leadinitem@external!.
+% \item In the definition of \cs{eqe@@leadinitem}, we also define \cs{solutionparshape}
+% to help control the paragraphs for this delicate problem of a lead-in item. Its
+% normal definition is \cs{@empty}, and this fact used to detect whether the document
+% author is trying to use two \cs{leadinitem}s in one \texttt{problem*} environment.
+%\item At the beginning of the definition of the command \cs{@exercise} (in \textsf{exerquiz}
+% we \cs{let} \cs{solutionparshape} to \cs{@empty}.
+% \item So too does \cs{solutionparshape} appear in the definition of
+% \cs{vspaceFmt} (\textsf{exerquiz}).
+% \item \cs{solutionparshape} use used to correctly format in the \texttt{solutionsafter},
+% found in \cs{solnexer@@@woparts} (\textsf{exerquiz}).
+%\end{itemize}
+% As can be seen, this simple feature is not so simple.\par\medskip\noindent
+% Set the default value of \cs{solutionparshape}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\solutionparshape\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  This is the beginning of \DescribeMacro{\leadinitem}\cs{leadinitem}, at least the
+% the active definition within the \texttt{problem*} environment, and outside
+% the \texttt{parts} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@leadinitem{%
+    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{solutionparshape} empty means \cs{leadinitem} hasn't been used yet,
+% so we can use it here by passing control to \cs{eqe@@leadinitem}, otherwise,
+% we toss an exception.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \def\eqe@next{\eqe@@leadinitem}%
+            \ifeqfortextbook\writeToSolnFile{\protect\bpartsmrk}\fi
+        \else
+        \def\eqe@next{\PackageError{eqexam}
+        {The \string\leadinitem\space command may
+        only be used\MessageBreak once per problem* environment}
+        {Remove all but one of the \string\leadinitem\space
+        commands.}}%
+    \fi\eqe@next
+}
+\newif\ifisleadin \isleadinfalse
+\let\isparshapeExpanded\eqe@NO
+\def\eqe@@leadinitem{\if\itsforleadinitem\eqe@NO
+    \setcounter{partno}{0}\fi\refstepcounter{partno}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% After initializing the counter, we make various calculations
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \eq@initializeContAnnot
+    \isleadintrue\let\isitleadin\eqe@YES
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We signal a \cs{leadinitem} by writing a special command to the AUX file,
+% this is used to disallow the use of the \texttt{*} option of points.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \eqe@writetoAux{\string
+        \csarg\string\gdef{leadinitem\thisexamlabel-\theeqquestionnoi}{}}%
+    \settowidth{\eq@tmpdima}{\normalfont\parts@indent\eqe@prtsepPrb}%
+    \xdef\leadinIndentPrtSep{\the\eq@tmpdima}%
+    \setlength{\eq@tmpdima}{\eqemargin+\eq@tmpdima}%
+    \xdef\leadinIndent{\the\eq@tmpdima}%
+    \settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\parts@indent}%
+    \edef\partsleadinIndent{\the\eq@tmplength}%
+    \setlength{\eq@tmplength}{\linewidth-\leadinIndentPrtSep}%
+    \edef\leadinIndentLength{\the\eq@tmplength}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \changes{v3.8}{2015/03/17}{Spacing is not correct with standard itemize and
+%    enumerate environments, this is a fix.}
+%    Modify \cs{@listii} from core LaTeX: Increase \cs{leftmarginii} and \cs{linewidth}
+%    appropriately.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{@listii@SAVE}{\global\let\@listii@SAVE\@listii}{}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\@listii\expandafter{\@listii@SAVE
+     \advance\leftmarginii\leadinIndentPrtSep\relax
+      \leftmargin\leftmarginii \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+      \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+%      \advance\linewidth\leadinIndentPrtSep\relax
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{parshape} for the first paragraph of the \cs{leadinitem}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \parshape=2 \eqemargin \linewidth \leadinIndent \leadinIndentLength
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the definition of \cs{solutionparshape}, we use the shape of
+% subsequent paragraphs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xdef\solutionparshape{%\noexpand\linewidth\leadinIndentLength
+        \noexpand\parshape=1 \leadinIndent\space\leadinIndentLength}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% After the current paragraph, we execute \cs{solutionparshape}, then
+% empty out \cs{everypar}. Seems to work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\let\isparshapeExpanded\eqe@NO
+    \everypar{\solutionparshape
+        \global\let\isparshapeExpanded\eqe@YES\everypar{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% These next lines were taken from \cs{eq@item@common} in \textsf{exerquiz}.
+% The command \cs{eq@insertContAnnot} was removed from the \cs{eq@item@common} code, it is not needed
+% here and caused trouble. We \cs{let} \cs{eq@item} to \cs{eq@leadin@item} to
+% continue the flow. \cs{@ckhide} checks for an optional argument (\texttt{h} or \texttt{H})
+% and sets switches as appropriate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\eq@item\eq@leadin@item\eqp@rtc@lcm@rk
+    \def\currhideopt{x}\eq@hidesolutionfalse\eq@nolinkfalse
+    \@ifnextchar[{\@ckhide}{\eq@item}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The final step. If the solution is hidden, we do not write the header.
+% \changes{v3.3a}{2013/05/03}{Changed name of \cs{eq@writeexheader} to \cs{eqExerSolnHeader}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eq@leadin@item{\eq@ckglobalhide\ifeq@hidesolution\else
+    \global\let\eqExerSolnHeader\eq@@writeexheaderlist\fi
+    \ifeq@nosolutions\eq@nolinktrue\fi
+    \unskip\noindent\makebox[\partsleadinIndent]{\eqexlisttabheader}%
+    \eqe@prtsepPrb\ignorespaces
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\tableadin}\cs{tableadin} is \cs{let} to \cs{eqe@tableadin} within
+% the \texttt{problem*} env. The switch \cs{if@tableadinitem} is defined in
+% \textsf{exerquiz}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@tableadin{\@tableadinitemtrue\eqe@writetoAux{\protect
+        \csarg\protect\gdef{tableadin\thisexamlabel-\theeqquestionnoi}{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\pushProblem}
+%    \begin{macro}{\popProblem}
+% There may be an occasion when a multi-part question needs to be broken between parts.
+% use the \cs{pushProblem} and \cs{popProblem} for this purpose. The push saves the
+% counter value, and ends the \texttt{parts} environment. The pop restarts the
+% \texttt{parts}, and resets the parts counter.
+% \changes{1.6b}{2006/3/12}
+% {
+%   Added \cs{pushProblem} and \cs{popProblem} to grant the ability to interrupt
+%   a parts environment for, for example, a multicolumn environment.
+% }
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+%In the example below, we have our parts in a \texttt{multicols} environment, we
+%\cs{pushProblem}, close \texttt{multicols}, \cs{popProblem} and continue with
+% the multi-parts in single column.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\item Compute $\lim_{x\to2^{\text{$-$}}} f(x)$
+%\begin{solution}[1in]\end{solution}
+%\pushProblem
+%\end{multicols}
+%\popProblem
+%\item What value(s) of $c$ make the function $f$
+%continuous at $x=2$?
+%\begin{solution}[.5in]\end{solution}
+%\end{parts}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\pushProblem{\xdef\nlastItem{\arabic{partno}}\end{parts}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2013/05/30) Adding an optional parameter to \cs{popProblem} to match
+% the option argument of the \texttt{parts} environment. This enables you
+% to push a \texttt{list} environment and push a \texttt{tabular} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\popProblem[1][]{%
+    \def\@argi{#1}\ifx\@argi\@empty
+    \def\eqe@bParts{\begin{parts}}\else
+    \def\eqe@bParts{\begin{parts}[#1]}\fi
+    \eqe@bParts\setcounter{partno}{\nlastItem}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lastPageTotal{0pt}
+\def\marginparafterhook{\xdef\lastPageTotal{\the\pagetotal}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\manualcalcparts} is the command calculates points
+% when the argument is \emph{not} \cs{auto}. The macro \cmd{\prob@Arg}
+% determines if the points argument passed is of the form \texttt{<num>ea}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prob@Arg#1ea#2\end{\def\argi{#1}\def\argii{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now begin \cs{manualcalcparts}; \texttt{\#1} is the number of points, which may be
+% of the form \texttt{<num>ea}, or just \texttt{<num>}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eqe@pointsEach\eqe@NO
+\def\manualcalcparts#1{%
+    \expandafter\prob@Arg#1ea\end
+    \ifx\argii\@empty\edef\numpoints{#1}%
+        \let\eqe@pointsEach\eqe@NO
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Argument form is \texttt{<num>} assumed: Total points specified, we
+% should ignore any \cs{PTs} commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \let\eqe@pointsPartsId\eqe@Zero
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Argument form is \texttt{<num>ea} assumed: Again we
+% should ignore any \cs{PTs} commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \gdef\probpointseach{x}\let\eqe@pointsPartsId\eqe@Two
+        \let\eqe@pointsEach\eqe@YES
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Points each specified
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \setcounter{eq@count}{\value{eqquestionnoi}}%
+        \addtocounter{eq@count}{1}\csarg
+         \ifx{prob\thisexamlabel.\theeq@count}\relax
+            \def\numpoints{\argi}\else
+            \def\numpoints{\expandafter
+                \csname prob\thisexamlabel.\theeq@count\endcsname}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v4.1}{2015/04/23}{Moved this segment of code to \cs{manualcalcparts},
+% it is taken from the main \texttt{problem*} env.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\yest@D@\eqe@YES
+            \setcounter{eq@count}{\value{eqquestionnoi}}%
+            \addtocounter{eq@count}{1}%
+            \@ifundefined{nPartsThisProb\thisexamlabel.\theeq@count}
+                {\makeOutOfNum{0}\makeDoNum{0}}{%
+                \expandafter\makeOutOfNum{%
+                \csname nPartsThisProb\thisexamlabel.%
+                    \theeq@count\endcsname}%
+                \expandafter\makeDoNum{%
+                \csname DoNumThisProb\thisexamlabel.%
+                    \theeq@count\endcsname}}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{marginpoints} is \cs{@empty}, the author has chosen the \texttt{nopoints} option
+% or used the \cs{NoPoints} command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\marginpoints\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% No points for this exam
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \else
+        \ifx\argi\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{argi} is empty, no points were specified, so we \cs{let}
+% \cs{marginpoints} to \cs{@empty}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \let\marginpoints\@empty
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Points are displayed in margins or inline
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifx\argii\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Total points specified}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \ifx\marginpoints\@empty\else
+                    \if\@isitstar\eqe@One
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Points to appear ``in-line'' rather than in the margins
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                        \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{#1}%
+                        \@marktotalvalue\ifdispl@yPoints
+                        \def\marginparafterhook{\itemPTsFormated{%
+                            \itemPTsTxt{\numpoints}}\space}\fi
+                    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Points appear in the margins
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                        \def\marginparpriorhook{\noindent
+                            \probvalue{\numpoints}{0}}%
+                    \fi
+                \fi
+            \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Points each specified}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \ifx\marginpoints\@empty\else
+                    \if\@isitstar\eqe@One\ifdispl@yPoints
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Points to appear ``in-line'' rather than in the margins
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                        \def\marginparafterhook{%
+                        \itemPTsFormated{\itemPTsEaTxt{\argi}}\space}\fi
+                    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Points appear in the margins
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                        \ifdispl@yPoints
+                            \def\marginparpriorhook{\noindent
+                            \marginpoints{\numpoints}{\argi}}\fi
+                    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Don't remember why I named this command the way I did, but it is use to pass
+% the number of points, when there is a \cs{leadinitem}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                    \edef\eqp@rtc@lcm@rk{\noexpand
+                    \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\argi}%
+                        \noexpand\@marktotalvalue}%
+                \fi
+            \fi
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifnum\value{eq@count}=1\relax
+        \eqe@IWO\@auxout{\string\csarg\string
+            \gdef{pagenofirstprob\thisexamlabel}{\thepage}}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\autocalcparts} is the command that computes the total points when
+% the author specifies \cs{auto} as the optional argument of \texttt{problem*}. The
+% commands \cmd{\acp@mpah} and \cmd{\acp@mpph} were recently (2012/04/21) separated
+% out to allow for additional customization, without re-defining the whole of
+% \cs{autocalcparts}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\acp@mpah{\itemPTsFormated{\itemPTsTxt{\numpoints}}\space}
+\def\acp@mpph{\noindent\marginpoints{\numpoints}{0}}
+\def\autocalcparts{%
+    \setcounter{eq@count}{\value{eqquestionnoi}}%
+    \addtocounter{eq@count}{1}%
+    \csarg\ifx{prob\thisexamlabel.\theeq@count}\relax
+        \def\numpoints{0}% assume zero points until we get the total
+    \else
+        \edef\numpoints{\@nameuse{prob\thisexamlabel.\theeq@count}}%
+    \fi
+%    \addtocounter{eqpointvalue}{\numpoints}\@marktotalvalue
+    \ifx\marginpoints\@empty\else
+        \ifdispl@yPoints
+            \if\@isitstar\eqe@One
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we have \texttt{*\cs{auto}}, the total is to appear inline.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \def\marginparafterhook{\acp@mpah}\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, the total will appear in the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \def\marginparpriorhook{\acp@mpph}\fi
+        \fi
+    \fi
+    \setcounter{eq@count}{0}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\forproblem}
+%    \begin{macro}{\foritem}
+%    \begin{macro}{\forleadinitem}
+% When typing solutions from assigned problems in a textbook, the problems
+% assigned are not consecutive.  You can set the problem number before the problem
+% environments by using the \cs{forproblem} command. The one required argument is
+% the problem number: \verb!\forproblem{10)!.
+% \changes{v1.6h}{2007/01/24}
+% {
+%   Added \cs{forproblem}, \cs{foritem}, \cs{aNewPage}
+% }
+% \changes{v3.6a}{2015/01/31}{Added \cs{eqe@fpmrk} to add to the uniqueness
+% of \cs{theHeqquestionnoi}.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eqe@fpmrk\@empty
+\newcommand{\forproblem}[1]{\def\eqe@fpmrk{-\the@exno}%
+    \setcounter{eqquestionnoi}{#1 - 1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A similar comment for \cs{item}. These are useful for making out solution
+% sets to homework assignments where problems are assigned from the textbook
+% and you want to give a solution to problem 12, part (b),  An example of usage is
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\forproblem{12}
+%\begin{problem*}
+%Factor each.
+%\begin{parts}
+%   \foritem{b} $ x^2 + 2x + 1 = ( x + 1 )^2 $
+%   \item       $ x^2 - x - 2 = ( x - 2 )( x + 1) $ % this is part (c)
+%   \foritem{e} $ x^2 + 7x + 10 = ( x - 2 )( x + 7) $
+%   \item ...   % this will be part (f)
+%\end{parts}
+%\end{problem*}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\foritem}[2][]{%
+    \setcounter{partno}{0}\def\@rgi{#1}\ifx\@rgi\@empty
+        \def\eqe@nextitem{\item}\else
+        \def\eqe@nextitem{\item[#1]}\fi
+    \foritem@cont{#2}}
+\newcommand{\forleadinitem}[2][]{%
+    \setcounter{partno}{0}\def\@rgi{#1}\ifx\@rgi\@empty
+        \def\eqe@nextitem{\leadinitem}\else
+        \def\eqe@nextitem{\leadinitem[#1]}\fi
+    \foritem@cont{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    (2017/01/04) Modified \cs{foritem@cont} to allow for numbering parts.
+%    \changes{v4.7}{2017/01/04}{Modified \cs{foritem@cont} to allow for numbering parts}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\foritem@cont#1{\ifuseNumForParts
+    \edef\fliPartNo{#1}\setcounter{partno}{#1-1}\else
+    \lowercase{\def\eq@selectedItem{#1}}%
+    \let\eq@initLoop\eqe@NO
+    \loop
+        \stepcounter{partno}\expandafter
+        \if\alph{partno}\eq@selectedItem
+            \let\eq@initLoop\eqe@YES\fi
+    \ifx\eq@initLoop\eqe@NO\repeat
+    \edef\fliPartNo{\the\c@partno}%
+    \addtocounter{partno}{-1}\fi\let\itsforleadinitem\eqe@YES
+    \eqe@nextitem}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% The command \cs{eqe@insertContAnnot} attempts to insert a string just prior
+% to a part, if that part begins a new page. To get it right, it promotes a new
+% page using the default of .25in. The optional parameter allows you to insert
+% a new value; this may be needed to get the string \cs{annotContStr} placed properly.
+% The commands
+%    \begin{macro}{\annotContStr}
+% \changes{v3.0l}{2011/08/22}{Defined \cs{eqe@insertContAnnot} and related commands}
+% The string that is typeset by the \cs{eqe@insertContAnnot} command.
+%    \begin{macro}{\acvspace}
+% User access to changing the vertical spacing \cs{promoteNewPage} uses within
+% \cs{eqe@insertContAnnot}.
+%    \begin{macro}{\resetacvspace}
+% Resets the vertical spacing back to its default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\annotContStr}{%
+    \textbf{Problem~{\eqeCurrProb} continued\strut}}
+\newcommand{\acvspace}[1]{\def\ic@vspace{#1}\setlength\iacvspace{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ic@vspacedefault} is the default vertical spacing used
+% by \cs{eqe@insertContAnnot}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\iacvspace
+\newcommand{\ic@vspacedefault}{1in} % changed .25in to 1in 2012/12/04
+\newcommand{\resetacvspace}{\setlength\iacvspace{\ic@vspacedefault}}
+\resetacvspace
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{eqe@insertContAnnot} promotes a new page, and if the current
+% page is different than the starting page, \cs{eq@currProbStartPage}, we
+% insert \cs{annotContStr}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcommand{\priorAnnotInsert}[1]{\def\eq@priorAnnotInsert{#1}}
+%\let\eq@priorAnnotInsert\relax
+\newcommand{\eqe@insertContAnnot}[1][\iacvspace]{\promoteNewPage[#1]%
+    \ifnum\arabic{page}>\eq@currProbStartPage
+        \xdef\eq@currProbStartPage{\arabic{page}}%
+        {\settowidth{\eq@tmplength}{\parts@indent\eqe@prtsepPrb}%
+        \xdef\eqe@partsIndent{\the\eq@tmplength}}%
+        \ifwithinparts
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{eq@item} is the \texttt{list} definition of \cs{item} which has been
+% \cs{let} to \cs{eq@item} within the \texttt{parts} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{eq@item@latex}{\item[]\hspace*{-\eqemargin}%
+        \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty\else\hspace*{-\eqe@partsIndent}\fi}
+        {\eq@item@latex[]\hspace*{-\eqemargin}%
+        \hspace{-\eqe@partsIndent}}\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If placed between problem sets, we indent as appropriate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \hspace*{-\eqemargin}\fi\annotContStr
+    \fi
+}
+\edef\eq@currProbStartPage{\arabic{page}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\turnContAnnotOff}
+%    \begin{macro}{\turnContAnnotOn}
+% Turn off and on this feature. The default is off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcommand{\@gobbloptone}[1][]{}
+\newcommand{\turnContAnnotOff}{\global\let\eq@insertContAnnot\relax}
+\newcommand{\turnContAnnotOn}{%
+    \global\let\eq@insertContAnnot\eqe@insertContAnnot}
+\turnContAnnotOff
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Used for manually inserting annot
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\insertContAnnot{\eq@insertContAnnot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\aNewPage}
+%    \begin{macro}{\qNewPage}
+% A simple command for inserting \cs{newpage}, only if the \cs{answerkey}
+% option has been taken.
+% \changes{v1.6h}{2007/01/24}
+% {
+%   Added \cs{aNewPage} and \cs{qNewPage}
+% }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\aNewPage{\ifanswerkey\newpage\fi}
+\newcommand\qNewPage{\ifanswerkey\else\newpage\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\OnBackOfPage}
+%
+% In an effort to make maximum use of the paper, I sometimes ask the
+% students to solve the problem on the back of a page. The following
+% command is an automated instruction. Generally, we work on the back
+% of the previous page, unless we are on page 1, in this case we work
+% on the back of page 1.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{backofpage}
+\newcommand\bopText{on the back of page~\boPage}
+\newcommand\bopCoverPageText{on the back of the cover page}
+\newcommand\OnBackOfPage[1][\bopText]{%
+    \refstepcounter{backofpage}\label{bop\thebackofpage}
+    \begingroup
+    \csarg\ifx{r@bop\thebackofpage}\relax
+        \def\boPage{??}\else
+        \edef\eqe@temp{\csname r@bop\thebackofpage\endcsname}%
+        \ifx\hyper@anchor\@undefined
+            \edef\boPage{\expandafter\@secondoftwo\eqe@temp}\else
+            \edef\boPage{\expandafter\@secondoffive\eqe@temp}\fi
+        \c@eq@count\boPage
+        \advance\c@eq@count-1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If on page 1, we work on the back of page 1, otherwise, we work on the
+% back of the previous page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \edef\boPage
+        {%
+            \ifx\eqex@coverpage\relax
+                \ifnum\value{eq@count}=0
+                    1%
+                \else
+                    \the\value{eq@count}%
+                \fi
+            \else
+                \ifnum\value{eq@count}=0
+                    -1%
+                \else
+                    \the\value{eq@count}%
+                \fi
+            \fi
+        }%
+    \fi
+    \csarg\ifx{r@bop\thebackofpage}\relax#1\else
+    \ifnum\boPage=-1\relax\bopCoverPageText\else#1\fi\fi
+    \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Vertical Space Filling Options}
+%
+% When the \texttt{nosolutions} or the \texttt{vspacewithsolns} is used, a
+% vertical space is generated by the \texttt{solution} environment.
+% Previously, this has just been a vertical white space, now, we provide
+% the ability to fill the space with horizontal rules of different types.
+% Below is the implementation of this.
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqWriteLineColor}
+% The color of the rule to use.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqWriteLineColor}[1]{\def\eq@WriteLineColor{#1}}
+\eqWriteLineColor{gray}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqWLSpacing}
+% The line spacing between the rules.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\wlVspace
+\newcommand{\eqWLSpacing}[1]{\setlength\wlVspace{#1}}
+\eqWLSpacing{14pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \paragraph*{Fill Types.} We have three types of line fill:
+% \cs{hrulefill}, \cs{dotfill}, and a custom rule \cs{eqdashrulefill}.
+% The commands three \cs{eqWriteLineFill}, \cs{eqWriteLineDots}, and
+% \cs{eqWriteLineDashFill} implements these three types. They are
+% \cs{let} to \cs{eqWriteLine}, which is used in \cs{vspaceFillerLines}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqWriteLineFill}{%
+    \textcolor{\eq@WriteLineColor}{\hrulefill}}
+%\newcommand{\eqWriteLineDots}{%
+%    \textcolor{\eq@WriteLineColor}{\dotfill}}
+\def\eqdotrulefile{\leavevmode
+    \cleaders\hb@xt@ .44em{\hbox to0pt{\hss.\hss}\hss}\hfill\kern\z@}
+\newcommand{\eqWriteLineDots}{%
+    \textcolor{\eq@WriteLineColor}{\eqdotrulefile}}
+%\def\eqdashrulefill{\leavevmode
+%    \cleaders\hb@xt@ .44em{\hss\rule{.22em}{.4pt}\hss}\hfill\kern\z@}
+\def\eqdashrulefill{\leavevmode%\kern-.11em
+    \cleaders\hb@xt@ .44em{\rule{.22em}{.4pt}\hss}\hfill\kern\z@}
+\newcommand{\eqWriteLineDashFill}{%
+    \textcolor{\eq@WriteLineColor}{\eqdashrulefill}}
+\newcommand{\eqWriteLineBlankFill}{\hfill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Use \DescribeMacro{\fillerLinesAlignDef}\cs{fillerLinesAlignDef} and
+% \DescribeMacro{\fillerLinesOnLeftMargin}\cs{fillerLinesOnLeftMargin} to adjust
+% the alignment of the rule lines for this feature. The first is the default,
+% the second one aligns rule lines to the left margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@equsedim \@equsedimtrue
+\newcommand{\useVspaceDimen}{\@equsedimtrue}
+\newcommand{\usenLineDimen}{\@equsedimfalse}
+\newif\if@eqalignfilllinestoleft\@eqalignfilllinestoleftfalse
+\newcommand{\fillerLinesOnLeftMargin}{\@eqalignfilllinestolefttrue}
+\newcommand{\fillerLinesAlignDef}{\@eqalignfilllinestoleftfalse}
+\newcommand\priorPageBreakMsg[1]{\def\priorP@geBre@kMsg{#1}}
+\let\priorP@geBre@kMsg\@empty
+\newcommand{\flPageBreakMsg}[1]{%\acvspace{2\wlVspace}%
+    \priorPageBreakMsg{\emitMessageNearBottom[2\wlVspace]
+    {\eqfititin{{\Large\strut}#1}}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\vspaceFillerLines}[1]{\begingroup\offinterlineskip
+    \parindent0pt\relax\parskip0pt
+    \@tempdima\wlVspace\eqetmplengtha0pt
+    \def\eqe@fillwidth{\linewidth+\eqetmplengtha}%
+    \settowidth{\eqetmplengthb}{\eqe@decPointPrb}%
+    \@whiledim\@tempdima<#1\relax\do{\priorP@geBre@kMsg
+        \eq@insertContAnnot\vskip\wlVspace\eqe@wrtLineKernal
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\makebox[\eqe@fillwidth]{\eqWriteLine}}%
+    \addtolength{\@tempdima}{.4pt+\wlVspace}\par
+    }\endgroup
+}
+\def\eq@linesXPgs{\begingroup\offinterlineskip
+    \parindent0pt\relax\parskip0pt
+    \@tempcnta=0 \eqetmplengtha0pt
+    \settowidth{\eqetmplengthb}{\eqe@decPointPrb}%
+    \def\eqe@fillwidth{\linewidth+\eqetmplengtha}%
+    \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\soln@keys@nLines\relax\do{\priorP@geBre@kMsg
+        \eq@insertContAnnot\vskip\wlVspace\eqe@wrtLineKernal
+        \makebox[0pt][l]{\makebox[\eqe@fillwidth]{\eqWriteLine}}%
+        \advance\@tempcnta1\relax}\par\endgroup
+}
+\def\eqe@wrtLineKernal{%
+    \ifx\solutionparshape\@empty
+        \if@eqalignfilllinestoleft
+             \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{\labelwidth+\eqemargin}%
+             \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+                {\eqetmplengtha+\eqetmplengthb}%
+             \ifwithinparts
+                \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{\labelwidth}%
+                 \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+                    {\eqetmplengtha+\eqetmplengthb}%
+                \ifx\eq@item\item@part@tabular
+                  \hspace*{-\eqemargin}\eqetmplengtha\eqemargin\else
+                  \hspace*{-\eqetmplengtha}\fi
+             \else
+                  \hspace*{-\eqemargin}\eqetmplengtha\eqemargin
+             \fi
+        \else
+             \ifwithinparts
+                 \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{\labelwidth}%
+                 \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+                    {\eqetmplengtha-\eqetmplengthb}%
+                \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}{\labelwidth}%
+                \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+                    {\eqetmplengtha+\eqetmplengthb}%
+                \ifx\eq@item\item@part@tabular
+                    \hspace*{\eqetmplengtha}%
+                    \settowidth{\eqetmplengthb}{\eqe@prtsepPrb}%
+                    \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+                        {-\labelwidth-\eqetmplengthb}\else
+                    \eqetmplengtha0pt\fi
+             \else
+                \eqetmplengtha0pt
+             \fi
+        \fi
+    \else
+        \if@eqalignfilllinestoleft
+            \setlength{\eqetmplengtha}
+            {\eqemargin+\leadinIndentPrtSep}%
+            \hspace*{-\eqetmplengtha}\else\hspace*{0pt}\fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\useFillerLines}
+% When used, the vertical space is written with lines (rules, dashes, dots).
+%\changes{v2.0e}{2011/03/07}
+%{%
+%  Added the feature of filling the vertical space with ruled lines of
+%  different types. This feature is available for paper options and for
+%  \texttt{nosolutions} and \texttt{vspacewithsolution} options.
+%}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\useFillerLines}{\let\vspaceFiller\vspaceFillerLines
+    \fillTypeDefault\@eqlinedfillertrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\useFillerDefault}
+% Resets the vertical space to the original white space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\useFillerDefault}{\let\vspaceFiller\vspaceFillerDefault
+    \let\eqWriteLine\hfill\@eqlinedfillerfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillTypeHRule}
+% Writes the line as a solid line (\cs{hrulefill}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fillTypeHRule}{\let\eqWriteLine\eqWriteLineFill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillTypeDots}
+% Writes the line as a dotted line (\cs{dotfill}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fillTypeDots}{\let\eqWriteLine\eqWriteLineDots}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillTypeDashLine}
+% Writes the line as a dotted line (\cs{eqdashrulefill}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fillTypeDashLine}{\let\eqWriteLine\eqWriteLineDashFill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillTypeBlankLine}
+% Fills the line
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fillTypeBlankLine}{\let\eqWriteLine\eqWriteLineBlankFill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillTypeDefault}
+% Resets fill type back to the default, \cs{hrulefill}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fillTypeDefault}{\let\eqWriteLine\eqWriteLineFill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% Set the \textsf{eqexam} page style, if not otherwise indicated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifeqfortextbook\else
+    \if@bypasseqexamheading\else
+\pagestyle{eqExamheadings}\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<*textbook>
+\ProvidesFile{eqtextb.def}
+ [2016/01/18 v4.6 Cmds used by the fortextbook option (dps)]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Concerning the \protect\texttt{fortextbook} option}\label{fortextbook}
+%
+% What are my goals/desired features? Modern (U.S.) textbooks---at least
+% the ones I'm familiar with---consist of some or all of the following
+% resources:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%    \item \textbf{Student Edition}: Answers to odd-numbered problems
+%    appear in the back of the text.
+%    \item[] We need to have a scheme where odd-numbered problems, under suitable options,
+%    are compiled. \textbf{Goal:} It does not need to be restricted to odd-numbered, however, need to latex only
+%    those problems that meet the ``include'' criteria.
+%    \item[] For chapter review problem sets, odd-number problems are have solutions in the
+%    back of the book.
+%    \item[] For chapter quizzes, odd-numbered (optionally all) solutions
+%       are in the back of the book.
+%
+%    \item \textbf{Instructor Edition}: Answers to all problems appear in
+%    the back of the book. Answers may also appear in the body of the text,
+%    in the margins of the text, or immediately after the statement of the
+%    problem. If the answer is too long, there is a cross-reference to the
+%    solution in the appendix.
+%    \item[] Some publishers I've seen have wide margins where additional material can be inserted
+%    (historical sketches, instructor notes, pictures, etc.). In these margins, the answers to the problems
+%    can appear. Other publishers put answer immediately
+%    following the questions. The latter is easy to do; just have a macro, say \verb!\ANS{$12.5$}!, which only
+%    expands when the ``instructor'' option is used.
+%    \item \textbf{Student Solution Manual}: Contains solutions to all
+%    odd-problems, as well as any review problems and chapter quizzes.
+%    Some publishers include all solutions to chapter quizzes.
+%   \item[] A solution manual is a separate publication. This document would be
+%       created by latexing one or more of the auxiliary file (\texttt{.sol})
+%       These files might have to be edited before the final compile. We include only the solutions
+%       that meet the include criteria (i.e., odd-numbered ones).
+%   \item[] The current features of \textsf{eqexam} is what is needed here. The authors need only
+%       include solutions to each problem in a \texttt{solution} environment. Now, I realize that often times
+%       the authors create the solutions, but someone else, possibly a grade student or contractor, solves the problems.
+%       In the latter case, the authors would probably not like to turn over the source files to the one solving and typesetting
+%       the problems.
+%    \item \textbf{Instructor Solution Manual}: Contains solutions to all
+%    problems, review problems, chapter quizzes.
+%   \item[] Similar comments for the instructor solution manual.
+% \end{itemize}
+% Some other thoughts by a contributor:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%\item Often there is a diagram or graphic within the problem -- this has
+%    some figure caption and after the running counter of the figure it is
+%    named the NUMBER of the problem (cross-reference to the problem number)
+%
+%\item Often the probs with soln are setup in two-column style.
+%
+%\item Often the PROBLEM NUMBER has a special formatting (not only bold and
+%    black), maybe with a colorframebox around or some special formatting
+%    from the author
+%
+%\item Of course I have seen in some EXAMPLES that there is a wide margin
+%    to put in additional graphics etc. setup in two-side style -- wide left
+%    margin on even pages, wide right margins on odd pages. Here as well
+%    are captions setup and cross-references.
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+%\subsection{Setting options with \texorpdfstring{\cs{textbookOpts}}{\textbackslash{textbookOpts}}}
+%    \begin{macro}{\textbookOpts}
+%    \begin{macro}{marginans}
+%    \begin{macro}{inlineans}
+%    \begin{macro}{marginsonleft}
+%    \begin{macro}{ssols}
+%    \begin{macro}{lsols}
+% We set up a command for setting the options for the \texttt{fortextbook} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[is]{instred}[true]{}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[is]{studented}[true]{%
+    \ifisstudented
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now let's try to filter out the even-numbered problems for the student edition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \tbfilterOutEvenNums
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The above command is normally \cs{let} to \cs{@gobble}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This code is executed in \cs{exambegdef}, the start up code of the \texttt{exam} environment.
+% This enables problems with fill-ins, true/false, or multiple choice, to have the answer appear
+% in the space provided.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tb@beginexam@code{%
+    \ifisinstred\answerkeytrue\eq@proofingtrue\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \verb!\eqEXt{\theeqquestionnoi}! and \verb!\endeqEXt\tok1\tok2! enclose each
+% solution, \cs{tbfilterOutEvenNums} redefines \cs{eqEXt} to gobble everything,
+% when the page number is even, through \cs{endeqEXt} and the two tokens it follows.
+% This leaves only the odd-numbered problems.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tbfilterOutEvenNums}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v3.3}{2013/04/07}{\textsf{exerquiz} changed \cs{eqEXt} to two variables, so
+% we make the same change here.}
+% \textsf{exerquiz} changed \cs{eqEXt} to two variables, so
+% we make the same change here
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\eqEXt##1##2{\ifodd##1\let\eqe@next\relax\else
+    \def\eqe@next{\gobbletoEndEXt}\fi\eqe@next}%
+}
+\newcommand{\tballowAllNums}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v3.3}{2013/04/07}{\textsf{exerquiz} changed \cs{eqEXt} to two variables, so
+% we make the same change here.}
+% \textsf{exerquiz} changed \cs{eqEXt} to two variables, so
+% we make the same change here
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \let\eqEXt\@gobble
+    \let\eqEXt\@gobbletwo
+    \let\endeqEXt\relax
+}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[is]{marginans}[true]{}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[is]{inlineans}[true]{}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[]{marginsonleft}[true]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If margins are always on left, we turn off switching of margin notes
+% as placed by \cs{marginpar}, and use \cs{reversemarginpar} to get them
+% on the left.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {\@mparswitchfalse\reversemarginpar}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[show]{ssols}[true]{}
+\define@boolkey{eqe@tbopts}[show]{lsols}[true]{%
+    \ifshowlsols\let\tb@soln@choice\tb@showlsols\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% The default settings are \texttt{true} for \texttt{studented} and
+% \texttt{false} for \texttt{instred}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\textbookOpts}[1]{\setkeys{eqe@tbopts}{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We do not allow both \texttt{instred} and \texttt{studented} to be true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifisinstred\global\isstudentedfalse\else
+        \ifisstudented\global\isinstredfalse
+    \fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.0v}{2012/03/14}{Include \cs{tbMakeFinalCalcs} at end of
+% \cs{textbookOpts}}
+% Added this part in in case \cs{textbookOpts} comes after \cs{marparboxwidth}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifdim\tbmarparboxwidth=1sp\else
+    \expandafter\tbMakeFinalCalcs\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As mentioned above, the default settings are \texttt{true} for \texttt{studented} and
+% \texttt{false} for \texttt{instred}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\isstudentedtrue
+\isinstredfalse
+\ismarginansfalse
+\isinlineansfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The command is available only in the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble{\textbookOpts}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\turnOffMarAnsOnAnsInline}
+%    \begin{macro}{\turnOnMarAnsOffAnsInline}
+%    \begin{macro}{\toggleInstrAns}
+% These three command may not be useful in the creation of a textbook, but
+% you never know, I used them in my demo doc \texttt{fortextbook.tex} to turn
+% off and on the display of the answers (change margin to inline, change inline to margin,
+% and toggle margin and inline).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\turnOffMarAnsOnAnsInline}{%
+    \global\ismarginansfalse\global\isinlineanstrue
+    \insMidMarg{\global\ismarginansfalse
+        \global\isinlineanstrue}%
+}
+\newcommand{\turnOnMarAnsOffAnsInline}{%
+    \global\ismarginanstrue\global\isinlineansfalse
+    \insMidMarg{\global\ismarginanstrue
+        \global\isinlineansfalse}%
+}
+\newcommand{\toggleInstrAns}{%
+    \ifisinstred\ifismarginans
+        \global\ismarginansfalse\global\isinlineanstrue
+        \insMidMarg{\global\ismarginansfalse
+            \global\isinlineanstrue}%
+    \else
+        \global\ismarginanstrue\global\isinlineansfalse
+        \insMidMarg{\global\ismarginanstrue
+            \global\isinlineansfalse}%
+    \fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Macros to display answers/shortsolns}
+% In this section, we develop some commands to display answers or short solutions. These
+% would appear if \texttt{instred=true}, in-line, or in the margins.
+%    \begin{macro}{\ANS}
+% Let us begin by creating a simple macro for saving an answer. The answer is displayed ``in-line.''
+% No verbatim-type text allowed, no unbalanced braces unless escaped. \cs{ANS} displays the answer
+% if the \texttt{instred} option of the \texttt{eqe@tbopts} family, i.e., by executing
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\bGrpANS}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eGrpANS}
+% Two macros used to group answers in the margins.
+%\changes{v3.0q}{2011/14/22}{Added \cs{bGrpANS} and \cs{eGrpANS}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifWithinANSGrp\WithinANSGrpfalse
+\newif\ifftb@isANSListOpen\ftb@isANSListOpenfalse
+\newcommand{\bGrpANS}{%
+    \if\probstar*\else
+        \PackageError{eqexam}{Use of \string\bGrpANS\space
+        only applies\MessageBreak to the problem* environment}{Please
+        remove this \string\bGrpANS.}%
+    \fi
+    \ifWithinANSGrp
+        \global\WithinANSGrpfalse
+        \let\tb@next\relax
+        \PackageError{eqexam}{\string\bGrpANS\space already open}
+        {You issued an earlier \string\bGrpANS,
+         but did not close it.}%
+    \else
+        \global\WithinANSGrptrue
+        \global\ftb@isANSListOpenfalse
+        \def\tb@next{\ANS}%
+    \fi
+    \tb@next
+}
+\newcommand{\eGrpANS}{%
+    \if\probstar*\else
+        \PackageError{eqexam}{Use of \string\eGrpANS\space
+        only applies\MessageBreak to the problem* environment}{Please
+        remove this \string\eGrpANS.}%
+    \fi
+    \ifWithinANSGrp
+        \global\WithinANSGrpfalse
+        \def\tb@next{\ANS}%
+     \else
+        \let\tb@next\relax
+        \PackageError{eqexam}{\string\eGrpANS\space already closed}
+        {You've issued two consecutive \string\eGrpANS\space
+         commands,\MessageBreak either remove this one
+        or the previous one.}%
+     \fi
+    \tb@next
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \cs{ANS} begin by checking to see if there is a star that follows the command,
+% this is used for inline answers. If \texttt{*} is present, we do not put the
+% answer inline, but will put it in the margins if the option call for it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ANS}{\@ifstar{\let\tb@istart=1\tb@ANS}
+    {\let\tb@istart=0\tb@ANS}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (10/13/2011) The following is the original definition of \cs{tb@ANS} before the creation of
+% the commands \cs{bGrpANS} and \cs{bGrpANS}. We keep this to revert to this definition
+% if this new feature causes problems.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newcommand{\tb@ANS}[1]{%
+%    \ifisinstred
+%        \ifisinlineans\if\tb@istart0\ANSFmt{\theeqquestionnoi}{#1}\fi\fi
+%        \ifismarginans
+%            \edef\eqe@prehold{\noexpand\par\kern0pt\noindent
+%                \if\probstar*%
+%                   \noexpand\begin{eqeList}[\tb@wparts@len]{%
+%                   \noexpand\eqedsplyOnlyFrst{\theeqquestionnoi}%
+%                   {\thepartno}\noexpand\eqe@hspannerMrg
+%                   \noexpand\makebox[\noexpand\tbmrgpartwdth]%
+%                        {\noexpand\tb@mrgPartFmt{\thepartno}}}%
+%                \else
+%                   \noexpand\begin{eqeList}%
+%                    {\noexpand\tb@mrgDigitFmt{%
+%                        \theeqquestionnoi\eqe@decPointMrg}}%
+%                \fi
+%            }\expandafter\insMidMarg%
+%                \expandafter{\eqe@prehold#1\end{eqeList}}%
+%        \fi
+%    \fi
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ftb@defineInsSpan} is used when there is an optional
+% argument for \cs{ANS}. It formats the range of parts,
+% for example, (a)--(c). This macro can be redefined, I suppose, to meet
+% the needs of the author.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftb@defineInsSpan#1{\def\ftb@argi{#1}\ifx\ftb@argi\@empty
+    \def\ftb@InsSpan{}\else\ftb@spanPrts{#1}%
+    \def\ftb@InsSpan{\noexpand\hspace{-\labelsep}%
+    \noexpand\textcolor{MRGPARTcolor}{--}\noexpand
+    \makebox[\noexpand\tbmrgpartwdth]{\noexpand
+    \tb@mrgPartFmt{\ftb@EndSpanPrts}}\eqe@hspannerMrg}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ftb@spanPrts} calculates the letter of the end of the
+% range. \texttt{\#1} is passed by \cs{ANS} (\cs{tb@ANS}, actually). For
+% example if we have \verb!\ANS[2]{...}!, \texttt{\#1=2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftb@spanPrts#1{{%
+    \advance\value{partno}by#1\relax
+    \xdef\ftb@EndSpanPrts{\thepartno}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ftb@EqeListPrtsFmt} is the internal formatting used within the \texttt{eqeList} for the part letter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftb@EqeListPrtsFmt{\noexpand
+    \makebox[\noexpand\tbmrgpartwdth]{\noexpand
+    \tb@mrgPartFmt{\thepartno}}\nobreak
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ftb@OpenEqeListPrts} opens an \texttt{eqeList} environment,
+% and displays the question number (optionally) and the part number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftb@OpenEqeListPrts{\noexpand
+   \begin{eqeList}[\tb@wparts@len]{\noexpand
+   \eqedsplyOnlyFrst{\theeqquestionnoi}%
+   {\thepartno}\noexpand\eqe@hspannerMrg\ftb@EqeListPrtsFmt}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ftb@CloseEqeList} closes the \texttt{eqeList} after
+% inserting \cs{qe@prehold} and the content, \texttt{\#1}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftb@CloseEqeList#1{\expandafter\insMidMarg%
+    \expandafter{\eqe@prehold#1\end{eqeList}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\grpANSDelimiter} delimits the parts
+% when \cs{bGrpANS}/\cs{eGrpANS} is used. May be redefined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\grpANSDelimiter}{\textcolor{MRGPARTcolor}{,}\space}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\tb@ANS} does the main work of \cs{ANS}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tb@ANS}[2][]{%
+    \ifisinstred
+        \ifisinlineans
+            \if\tb@istart0\ANSFmt{\theeqquestionnoi}{#2}\fi
+        \fi
+        \ifismarginans
+            \ftb@defineInsSpan{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We create the code that we will introduce into \cs{insMidMarg}, this will
+% be introduced prior to \texttt{\#2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \edef\eqe@prehold{%
+                \if\probstar*%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If this question is one with parts...
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                    \ifftb@isANSListOpen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the list is already open (\cs{ifftb@isANSListOpen}),
+% we just add content to the \texttt{eqeList} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                       \ftb@EqeListPrtsFmt\noexpand\eqe@hspannerMrg
+                    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the list is not open, we start the \texttt{eqeList} environment
+% in the usual way, this also includes the case where \cs{bGrpAns} is
+% not uses, which is normally the case.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                        \noexpand\par\kern0pt\noindent
+                        \ftb@OpenEqeListPrts\ftb@InsSpan
+                    \fi
+                \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This is a question without parts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                   \noexpand\begin{eqeList}%
+                    {\noexpand\tb@mrgDigitFmt{%
+                    \theeqquestionnoi\eqe@decPointMrg}}%
+                \fi
+            }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have finished constructing \cs{eqe@prehold}. We next set
+% \cs{ftb@isANSListOpen} to \texttt{true}, if \cs{WithinANSGrp} is \texttt{true}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifWithinANSGrp\global\ftb@isANSListOpentrue\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we are within an open group, we emit \cs{insMidMarg} with the
+% \cs{eqe@prehold}, followed by \texttt{\#2}, and a comma-space combo,
+% but \emph{we do not close} the \texttt{eqeList} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifWithinANSGrp
+                \expandafter\insMidMarg\expandafter
+                    {\eqe@prehold#2\grpANSDelimiter}%
+            \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This is the normal case, we insert \cs{eqe@prehold}, \texttt{\#2}, and
+% close the \texttt{eqeList} environment.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \expandafter\insMidMarg%
+                \expandafter{\eqe@prehold#2\end{eqeList}}%
+                \global\ftb@isANSListOpenfalse
+            \fi
+        \fi % \ifismarginans
+    \fi %\ifisinstred
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End (10/13)
+%    \begin{environment}{eqeList}
+% An environment used to format the answers in the margins, when
+% \texttt{marginans} is in effect.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{eqeList}[2][\tb@woparts@len]{\begin{list}{#2}{%
+    \def\argi{#1}\setlength{\labelwidth}{#1}%
+    \ifx\argi\tb@wparts@len
+    \settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@prtsepMrg}\else
+    \settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@hspannerMrg}\fi
+    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth+\labelsep}%
+    \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\topsep}{1pt}\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}\setlength{\itemsep}{3pt}%
+}\item\relax}{\end{list}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+% \paragraph*{Formatting Answers and Solutions}
+%    \begin{macro}{\mrgDigitFmt}
+% Format of the digit (and the decimal point) for the answers in the margins.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\mrgDigitFmt{\textbf{#1}}
+%\mrgPartFmt{\textbf{(\hfil#1\hfil)}}
+%\setMarIndents[\bfseries\normalsize\normalfont]{00}{(d)}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mrgDigitFmt}[1]{\def\tb@mrgDigitFmt##1{#1}}
+\mrgDigitFmt{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\mrgPartFmt}
+% Format of the part (including possibly the parentheses), example give above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\definecolor{MRGPARTcolor}{named}{black}
+\newcommand{\mrgPartFmt}[1]{\def\tb@mrgPartFmt##1{#1}}
+\mrgPartFmt{\textcolor{MRGPARTcolor}{(\hfil#1\hfil)}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{ANScolor}
+% The default color of the answers that appear in the margins or inline.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\definecolor{ANScolor}{rgb}{0,0,.8}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\ANSFmt}
+% The command that sets the format, may be redefined as needed. Used in the
+% \cs{ANS} command above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ANSFmt}[2]{\textcolor{ANScolor}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% We have two environments that we use in three different situations:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%    \item \texttt{eqequestions} environment: (1) Used to control the display of the
+%           \texttt{probset} environment within the body of the textbook; (2) used
+%           to control the display of the solutions ``in the back of the book.''
+%    \item \texttt{eqeList} environment: Used for displaying answers in the margin of
+%           the book, when the appropriate options allow it.
+%\end{itemize}
+% We want to be able to manipulate some of the parameters of these three
+% situation, independently of each other. There are several issues, setting
+% what I have been calling the gutter width, and the display of the problem
+% numbers.
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+% We define four commands for each of the three situations described above. The names
+% have a pattern to them, and similarly named commands have the same use.
+%
+% The numbering of the problems has the pattern: \verb*!dd. (a) !
+% We provide convenience commands to give these internal macros values
+%    \begin{macro}{\prbDecPt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\prbPrtsep}
+%    \begin{macro}{\prbNumPrtsep}
+% Basic parameters for the problems in the body of the text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@decPointPrb{.}     % decimal point of prob number
+\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{\ }      % prob with parts, space after part
+\def\eqe@hspannerPrb{\ }    % space after prob number
+\providecommand{\prbDecPt}[1]{\def\eqe@decPointPrb{#1}}
+\providecommand{\prbPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{#1}}
+\providecommand{\exPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepPrb{#1}}
+\providecommand{\prbNumPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@hspannerPrb{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\solDecPt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\solPrtsep}
+%    \begin{macro}{\solNumPrtsep}
+% Basic parameters for the problems in the solution sets.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqedecPointSoln{.}    % decimal point of prob number
+\def\eqe@prtsepSoln{\ }     % prob with parts, space after part
+\def\eqe@hspannerSoln{\ }   % space after prob number
+\newcommand{\solDecPt}[1]{\def\eqedecPointSoln{#1}}
+\newcommand{\solPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepSoln{#1}}
+\providecommand{\solNumPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@hspannerSoln{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\mrgDecPt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\mrgPrtsep}
+%    \begin{macro}{\mrgNumPrtsep}
+% Basic parameters for the problems in the margins.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@decPointMrg{.}     % decimal point of prob number
+\def\eqe@prtsepMrg{\ }      % prob with parts, space after part
+\def\eqe@hspannerMrg{\ }    % space after prob number
+\newcommand{\mrgDecPt}[1]{\def\eqe@decPointMrg{#1}}
+\newcommand{\mrgPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@prtsepMrg{#1}}
+\newcommand{\mrgNumPrtsep}[1]{\def\eqe@hspannerMrg{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\setMarIndents}
+% Sets some dimensions used by the \texttt{eqeList} environment.
+% \cs{tb@woparts@len} is calculated and
+% is used as the default gutter width in \texttt{eqeList}. \cs{tb@wparts@len}
+% is used for the gutter width for the gutter width when there is a problem
+% with parts. Finally, \cs{tbmrgpartwdth} in \cs{ANS} and is used for the width
+% of a \cs{makebox} that enclosed the part letter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setMarIndents}[3][\normalsize\normalfont]{{%
+    \settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1#2\eqe@decPointMrg}%
+    \xdef\tb@woparts@len{\the\@tempdima}%
+    \settowidth{\@tempdima}%
+        {#1#2\eqe@decPointMrg\eqe@hspannerMrg#3}%
+    \xdef\tb@wparts@len{\the\@tempdima}%
+    \settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1#3}%
+    \xdef\tbmrgpartwdth{\the\@tempdima}%
+}}
+\setMarIndents{00}{(d)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\setSolnIndent}
+% Used to set the some parameters used by \texttt{eqequestions}, in the solutions file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\solnGutter
+\newcommand{\setSolnIndent}[3][\normalsize\normalfont\bfseries]{%
+    {\settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1#2\eqedecPointSoln\eqe@hspannerSoln}%
+    \global\solnGutter\@tempdima
+    \settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1#3}%
+    \xdef\tbsolnpartwdth{\the\@tempdima}%
+}}
+\setSolnIndent{00}{(d)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\setSolnMargins}
+% This command is written to the solution file, and expanded when that file
+% is input back in. If \cs{solnGutter} is not \texttt{0pt}, we set the length
+% of \cs{eqemargin} using the current value; otherwise, we use the value
+% determined by \cs{setSolnIndent}, above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\setSolnMargins}[1]{%
+    \ifdim\solnGutter=0pt \setlength\eqemargin{#1}\else
+    \setlength\eqemargin{\solnGutter}\fi}
+%\newcommand{\defaultSolnIndent}{\gdef\solnGutter{0pt}}
+\newcommand{\defaultSolnIndent}{\global\solnGutter=0pt}
+\defaultSolnIndent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\prbNumFmt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\solWoPrtsFmt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\solWPrtsFmt}
+% We redefine \cs{exlabelformat}, \cs{exsllabelformat}, and
+% \cs{exsllabelformatwp}. They are defined in such a way as
+% to simply their modification through a series of simple
+% formatting commands. The defaults are
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\prbNumFmt{\textbf{#1}}
+%\solWoPrtsFmt{\textbf{#1}}
+%\solWPrtsFmt{\textbf{#1}}{(\hfil#2\hfil)}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\exlabelformat}{%
+    \tbprbNumFmt{\theeqquestionnoi\eqe@decPointPrb}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{prbNumFmt} is the format for the number of the problems
+% in the body of the text. The argument \texttt{\#1} is a symbolic
+% argument for the question number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\prbNumFmt}[1]{\def\tbprbNumFmt##1{#1\eqe@hspannerPrb}}
+\prbNumFmt{\textbf{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Redefine \cs{exsllabelformat}, and \cs{exsllabelformatwp}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\exsllabelformat}{\string\tbsolWoPrtsFmt{%
+    \theeqquestionnoi\string\eqedecPointSoln}}
+\renewcommand{\exsllabelformatwp}{\string\tbsolWPrtsFmt%
+    {\string\eqedsplyOnlyFrst{\theeqquestionnoi}{\thepartno}}%
+    {\thepartno}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{solWoPrtsFmt} is the format for the number of the problems
+% in the solution set. The argument \texttt{\#1} is a symbolic
+% argument for the question number. \cs{solWPrtsFmt} is the format
+% for a problem with parts in the solution file. \texttt{\#1} is
+% symbolically the question number, and \texttt{\#2} is a
+% symbolic for the part letter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\solWoPrtsFmt}[1]{\def\tbsolWoPrtsFmt##1{%
+    \makebox[0pt][r]{#1\eqe@hspannerSoln}}}
+\solWoPrtsFmt{\textbf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\solWPrtsFmt}[2]{\def\tbsolWPrtsFmt##1##2{%
+    \makebox[0pt][r]{#1\eqe@hspannerSoln}%
+    \makebox[\tbsolnpartwdth][l]{#2}\eqe@prtsepSoln%
+}}
+\solWPrtsFmt{\textbf{#1}}{(\hfil#2\hfil)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An alternate definition for \cs{solWPrtsFmt}, used by \cs{hangSolWPrtsFmt}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\solWPrtsFmt@hang}[2]{%
+    \def\tbsolWPrtsFmt##1##2{%
+    \makebox[0pt][r]{#1\eqe@prtsepSoln%
+    \makebox[\tbsolnpartwdth][l]{#2}\eqe@hspannerSoln}%
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\hangSolWPrtsFmt}
+% The command takes two arguments, the same as \cs{solWPrtsFmt}. When this
+% command is executed in the preamble, we get hanging indentation for problems
+% with parts.
+%\changes{v3.0g}{2011/08/15}{Use this to use ``hanging indentation'' for the
+% parts for problems with parts in the solutions file.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bpartsmrk\relax
+\let\epartsmrk\relax
+\newcommand{\hangSolWPrtsFmt}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% At the beginning and ending of a parts environment, we begin and end
+% a special \texttt{eqepartsquestions} environment, designed to give
+% the desired indentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\prior@parts@hook{%
+        \ifisleadin\else
+        \writeToSolnFile{^^J\protect\bpartsmrk}\fi}%
+    \def\post@parts@hook{%
+        \writeToSolnFile{\protect\epartsmrk^^J}}%
+    \def\bpartsmrk{\global\firstitemtrue\begin{eqepartsquestions}}%
+    \def\epartsmrk{\end{eqepartsquestions}\global\firstitemfalse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We must also redefine \cs{solWPrtsFmt} by letting it to
+% \cs{solWPrtsFmt@hang}, then executing it using the parameters passed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\solWPrtsFmt\solWPrtsFmt@hang
+     \solWPrtsFmt{#1}{#2}%
+}
+%\@onlypreamble\hangSolWPrtsFmt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% Define some switches, token registers, and boxes for managing
+% the answers and marginal notes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifexamenv \examenvfalse
+\newif\iffirstemit \firstemittrue
+\newtoks\txtbkt@ks \txtbkt@ks={}
+\newtoks\txtbkt@ksi \txtbkt@ksi={}
+\newbox\txtbkb@xb@t
+\newbox\txtbkb@xt@p
+\newbox\txtbkb@xh@ld
+\let\tbTopMargin\relax
+\let\tbBotMargin\relax
+\long\def\tb@addtoTopMargin#1{\txtbkt@ksi={#1}%
+    \edef\eqe@tmphold{\the\txtbkt@ksi\the\txtbkt@ks}%
+    \global\txtbkt@ks=\expandafter{\eqe@tmphold}%
+}
+\newcommand{\tb@addtoMargin}[1]{%
+    \edef\eqe@tmphold{\the\txtbkt@ks}%
+    \global\txtbkt@ks=\expandafter{\eqe@tmphold#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As my first attempt, let's create two comment environmets to be used within
+% the \texttt{solution} environment.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{solution}
+%\begin{ssol}
+%   <short solution/answer>
+%\end{ssol}
+%\begin{lsol}
+%   <long solution>
+%\end{lsol}
+%\end{solution}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The control of these environments are made through
+%    \begin{environment}{lsol}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tb@showlsols}
+% Place full (or long) solutions in this environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tb@showlsols}{\includecomment{lsol}\excludecomment{ssol}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \begin{environment}{ssol}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tb@showssols}
+% Place short solutions in this environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tb@showssols}{\includecomment{ssol}\excludecomment{lsol}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{environment}
+% The default is to show the short solutions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tb@soln@choice\tb@showssols
+%\let\tb@sols@choice\tb@showssols
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Marginal Matter.} There are three levels in the margins:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+%   \item \textbf{Top level}: This is a command \cs{tbTopMargin} with may be
+%          redefined between pages. It should have the width of the \cs{parbox}
+%          that contains all the content of the margin, this width is \cs{tb@marparboxwidth}
+%          (\texttt{\cs{oddsidemargin}-\cs{marginparsep}}). The content \emph{must} be
+%          unbreakable across pages. The content of \cs{tbTopMargin} will appear \emph{on
+%          every page subsequent to its definition}.
+%    \item[] \DescribeMacro{\clearTopMargin} We can clear the top level using the following command
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\clearTopMargin}{\global\let\tbTopMargin\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \item[] Clearing will take effect on the following page.
+%    \item[] \DescribeMacro{\setTopMargin} As a convenience macro, we can create top margin content.
+%            Redefinitions will appear on the next page from where the definition was made.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setTopMargin}[1]{%
+    \gdef\tbTopMargin{\color@begingroup\normalcolor
+        #1\color@endgroup}%
+    \gdef\tbSaveTopMargin{\color@begingroup\normalcolor
+        #1\color@endgroup}}
+\let\tbTopMargin\@empty
+\let\tbSaveTopMargin\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \item \textbf{Middle level}: The middle level is the most interesting. You write to it
+%          using \cs{insMidMarg}. Normally, this is text. If there is too much text,
+%          it will be split off and placed in the middle level of the next page. The command
+%          \cs{ANS} also writes to the middle level when the \texttt{instred} and \texttt{marginans} options are
+%           taken.
+%    \item \textbf{Bottom level}: This is similar to the top level, but on the bottom. The
+%         command is named \cs{tbBotMargin} and follows the same rules as \cs{tbTopMargin}.
+%         Again, the content of \cs{tbBotMargin} will appear \emph{on every
+%         page subsequent to its definition}.
+%    \item[] \DescribeMacro{\clearBotMargin} We can clear the bottom level using the following command
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\clearBotMargin}{\global\let\tbBotMargin\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \item[] Clearing will take effect on the following page.
+%    \item[] \DescribeMacro{\setBotMargin} As a convenience macro, we can create bottom margin content.
+%            Redefinitions will appear on the next page from where the definition was made.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setBotMargin}[1]{\gdef\tbBotMargin{#1}%
+    \gdef\tbSaveBotMargin{#1}}
+\let\tbBotMargin\@empty
+\let\tbSaveBotMargin\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\restoreLastTopMargin}{\expandafter\setTopMargin
+    \expandafter{\tbSaveTopMargin}}
+\newcommand{\restoreLastBotMargin}{\expandafter\setBotMargin
+    \expandafter{\tbSaveBotMargin}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\insMidMarg}
+% \cs{insMidMarg} is a \cs{parbox} that will hold the material in the margin.
+%    \begin{macro}{\MarParBoxFmt}
+% The formatting for the marginal \cs{parbox}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\MarParBoxFmt}{\normalsfcodes
+    \normalfont\normalsize\normalbaselines\parindent0pt
+    \vbadness\@Mi \hbadness5000 \tolerance9999
+    \parskip0pt\raggedright %\spaceskip=0pt\xspaceskip=0pt
+    \setlength{\linewidth}{\tbmarparboxwidth}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbmarparboxwidth}
+% The width of the margin box. Initial value of \texttt{1sp}, if the user does not
+% reset the value, it is a package error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\tbmarparboxwidth
+\setlength\tbmarparboxwidth{1sp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{MidMargcolor}
+% The default color of text of the middle level
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\definecolor{MidMargcolor}{rgb}{0,0,.8}
+\newcommand{\midMargFmt}[1]{%
+    \def\tb@midMargFmt{\normalfont\normalsize\normalcolor#1}}
+\midMargFmt{\color{MidMargcolor}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqe@MarParBox}
+% This is the actual \cs{parbox} that holds the marginal material. I have two versions
+% of this box, the first one has height \cs{textheight}, the second one has height
+% \texttt{\cs{textheight}+\cs{footskip}}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\eqe@MarParBox#1{\parbox[b][\textheight][t]%
+%    {\tbmarparboxwidth}{\color{MidMargcolor}#1}}
+\def\eqe@MarParBox#1{\lower\footskip\hbox{%
+    \leavevmode\parbox[b][\textheight+\footskip][t]%
+    {\tbmarparboxwidth}{\tb@midMargFmt#1}}} %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% Finally, we get to the \cs{insMidMarg}, this is used to write to the middle
+% level.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\insMidMarg}[1]{%
+    \let\eqe@margininsert\@empty
+    \expandafter\tb@addtoMargin\expandafter{\eqe@margininsert#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbPreMarginHeader}
+% Executed prior to the marginal heading
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbPostMarginHeader}
+% Executed after the marginal heading
+%    \begin{macro}{HEADERcolor}
+% Default color of a marginal header
+%    \begin{macro}{\cngMargHeadColorTo}
+% Changes the marginal header to a named color
+%\changes{v3.0o}{2011/09/20}{Added \cs{cngMargHeadColorTo} and
+% \cs{resetMargHeadColor} to make it easier to change the color
+% of the header globally, or just once.}
+%    \begin{macro}{\resetMargHeadColor}
+% Reset the marginal header color to the default, \texttt{HEADERcolor}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbMarginHeaderFmt}
+% Formatting for a marginal header.
+% Format the marginal header, the default is \texttt{HEADERcolor} in bold
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tbPreMarginHeader}{\par\penalty0 \kern3pt}
+\newcommand{\tbPostMarginHeader}{\par\nobreak}
+\definecolor{HEADERcolor}{named}{black}
+\newcommand{\cngMargHeadColorTo}[1]{\insMidMarg{\gdef\tb@MHC{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\resetMargHeadColor}{\insMidMarg{\gdef\tb@MHC{HEADERcolor}}}
+\resetMargHeadColor
+\newcommand{\tbMarginHeaderFmt}[1]{\textcolor{\tb@MHC}{\textbf{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\insMargHead}
+% Used to insert a general marginal heading into the middle level. The
+% optional parameter allows you to set a mark.
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\insProbHead}
+% Used to insert a marginal heading for a problem set into the middle level.
+% The optional parameter allows you to insert a mark, the default mark is
+% \verb!#1 \tbcontinued!.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\insMargHead}[2][]{% dps
+    \insMidMarg{\tb@marginHeader{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\insProbHead}[2][]{%
+    \def\tb@argi{#1}\ifx\tb@argi\@empty
+        \protected@xdef\currProbHead{#2 \tbcontinued}\else
+        \protected@xdef\currProbHead{#1}\fi
+    \ifisinstred\ifismarginans
+        \insMidMarg{\tb@marginProbHeader{#1}{#2}}\fi\fi
+}
+\newcommand{\tb@marginProbHeader}[2]{%
+    \def\tb@argi{#1}\ifx\tb@argi\@empty
+    \tb@marginHeader{#2 \tbcontinued}{#2}\else
+    \tb@marginHeader{#1}{#2}\fi
+}
+\newcommand{\tb@marginHeader}[2]{\tbPreMarginHeader
+    \tbMarginHeaderFmt{#2}\def\tb@argi{#1}\ifx\tb@argi\@empty
+    \mark{#2}\else\mark{#1}\fi\tbPostMarginHeader
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbcontinued}
+% The continue annot that appear when a problem set flows over to the next page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tbcontinued}{(cont.)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbplaceMargins}
+% Redefine this macro to set the locations of the margins we are writing to.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\marparboxwidth}[1]{%
+    \setlength\tbmarparboxwidth{#1}%
+    \setlength{\marginparwidth}{\tbmarparboxwidth}%
+    \tbMakeFinalCalcs
+}
+\@onlypreamble\marparboxwidth
+\newcommand{\chkmarginboxwidth}{%
+    \ifdim\tbmarparboxwidth=1sp \PackageError{eqexam}%
+    {You have not set the value of\MessageBreak
+        \string\marparboxwidth}%
+    {Define the \string\marparboxwidth\space command}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\ifmarginsonleft}
+% A Boolean switch, if true, all margins are on the left; otherwise, they alternate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmarginsonleft \marginsonleftfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbSetupForMargins}
+% We compute \cs{oddsidemargin}, \cs{evensidemargin}, and \cs{textwidth}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tbSetupForMargins}{%
+    \ifmarginsonleft
+        \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\tbmarparboxwidth+\marginparsep}%
+        \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}%
+        \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth-2in-\oddsidemargin}%
+    \else
+        \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0pt}%
+        \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\tbmarparboxwidth+\marginparsep}%
+        \setlength{\textwidth}{%
+            \paperwidth-2in-\oddsidemargin-\evensidemargin}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbplaceMargins}
+% We calculate the coordinates of the lower left hand corner of the margin \cs{parbox}
+% depending on the value of \cs{ifmarginsonleft}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tbplaceMargins}{{%
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{%
+        \paperheight-1in-\topmargin-\headheight-\headsep-\textheight}%
+    \xdef\@evenlly{\strip@pt\@tempdima}%
+    \xdef\@oddlly{\@evenlly}%
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{1in}%
+    \xdef\@evenllx{\strip@pt\@tempdima}%
+    \ifmarginsonleft\else
+        \setlength{\@tempdima}{1in+\textwidth+\marginparsep}\fi
+    \xdef\@oddllx{\strip@pt\@tempdima}%
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbMakeFinalCalcs}
+% Executed by \cs{marparboxwidth}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tbMakeFinalCalcs}{%
+    \tbSetupForMargins
+    \tbplaceMargins
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\tbminskipbtnlayers}
+% \cs{tbminskipbtnlayers} is the minimum skip between layers (top, middle, bottom)
+% Executed by \cs{marparboxwidth}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\tbminskipbtnlayers
+\setlength{\tbminskipbtnlayers}{6pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifiscarryover \iscarryoverfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{carryoverFmt}
+% is a work-around for the color problem
+% experienced with carry over text: Suppose there is a change of
+% color of the text on the previous page, the carry over text will naturally be
+% colored the default color, \texttt{MidMargcolor}. To continue the text with the same color
+% as the one the previous page, we enclose the text in the
+% \texttt{carryoverFmt} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{carryOverFmt}[1]{#1\let\tb@carryoverFmt\@empty
+    \c@rryoverFmt{#1}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+% This command is called by the \texttt{carryOverFmt} environment.
+% it takes its argument, which is a change in color or style, and
+% defines \cs{tb@carryoverFmt}, which will be executed on the next page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@rryoverFmt#1{%
+    \ifx\tb@carryoverFmt\@empty
+        \global\let\tb@carryoverFmt\@empty
+        \xdef\tb@co@page{\thepage}%
+        \gdef\tb@carryoverFmt{\ifnum\thepage>\tb@co@page\relax
+        #1\global\let\tb@carryoverFmt\@empty\fi}%
+    \fi
+}
+\let\tb@carryoverFmt\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{tb@insertCarryOver} takes its argument, that is always
+% \verb!\unvbox\txtbkb@xb@t}!, and if there is any carryover
+% content, will insert its argument followed by a copy,
+% \cs{tb@rest@reMarginFmt} of the default margin format. This seems
+% to work for recovering from a change of text or style over a page
+% boundary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tb@rest@reMarginFmt\relax
+\def\tb@insertCarryOver#1{%
+    \let\tb@rest@reMarginFmt\relax
+    \ifiscarryover\ifx\tb@carryoverFmt\@empty\else
+        \let\tb@rest@reMarginFmt\tb@midMargFmt
+        \tb@carryoverFmt\fi\fi
+    #1 \tb@rest@reMarginFmt
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqe@tb@shipout}
+% We define the shipout to the margins.\par\medskip\noindent
+% \textbf{Bug:} When I use \textsf{graphicxsp}, embed the picture (such as a logo),
+% and use that picture as the \cs{setTopMargin}, the shipout routine is executed
+% twice for each page. I haven't figured out what causes this, but here is a
+% work around. We record the most recent page number, if it equals the page number
+% of the last iteration of \cs{eqe@tb@shipout}, we do nothing; otherwise,
+% execute the shipout code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftb@shipoutPermitted \tb@shipoutPermittedtrue
+\newcommand{\turnOnFTBShipout}{\global\tb@shipoutPermittedtrue}
+\newcommand{\turnOffFTBShipout}{\global\tb@shipoutPermittedfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v3.7a}{2015/02/26}{Added a new Boolean switch \cs{iftb@shipoutPermitted}
+% to turn off the shipout. Two convenience commands in support are also added,
+% \cs{turnOffFTBShipout} and \cs{turnOffFTBShipout}.}
+% \DescribeMacro{\turnOnFTBShipout}\cmd{\turnOnFTBShipout} turns on the shipout,
+% the default, and \DescribeMacro{\turnOffFTBShipout}\cmd{\turnOffFTBShipout}
+% turns it off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqe@tb@shipout}{\iftb@shipoutPermitted
+    \ifnum\arabic{page}=\tblastpageshipped
+    \let\tb@so@next\relax\else
+    \xdef\tblastpageshipped{\arabic{page}}%
+    \def\tb@so@next{\eqe@tb@ship@ut}\fi
+    \expandafter\tb@so@next\fi
+}
+\def\tblastpageshipped{-100}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the actual shipout code for writing to the margins.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqe@tb@ship@ut}{%
+    \fboxsep=0pt\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}%
+    \global\setbox\txtbkb@xb@t=\vbox\bgroup
+         \color@begingroup
+         \hsize=\tbmarparboxwidth
+         \vsize=\textheight
+         \MarParBoxFmt
+         \csname tbTopMargin\endcsname
+         \vskip\tbminskipbtnlayers
+\set@typeset@protect
+         \the\txtbkt@ks
+         \color@endgroup\vfil
+    \egroup
+    \global\setbox\txtbkb@xt@p=\vsplit\txtbkb@xb@t to\textheight
+    \ifvoid\txtbkb@xb@t\global\iscarryoverfalse
+    \else\global\iscarryovertrue\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have three levels the top (\cs{tbTopMargin}), the bottom (\cs{tbBotMargin}),
+% and the middle (\cs{txtbkt@ks}). \cs{tbTopMargin} is no problem but \cs{tbBotMargin}
+% requires some special attention.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\tbBotMargin\relax\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{tbBotMargin} is not \cs{relax}, we begin by putting \cs{tbBotMargin}
+% into a \cs{vbox} under the same assumptions, and get its height.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \bgroup\setbox2=\vbox{%
+            \color@begingroup\normalcolor
+            \hsize=\tbmarparboxwidth\kern0pt
+            \MarParBoxFmt\csname tbBotMargin\endcsname
+            \color@endgroup
+            \kern0pt
+        }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We reduce \cs{textheight} by the height of \cs{tbBotMargin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \dimen0=\textheight
+        \advance\dimen0-\ht\txtbkb@xh@ld
+        \advance\dimen0-\tbminskipbtnlayers
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We split off the top material by this amount, the new bottom
+% is in \cs{txtbkb@xt@p} the new top is in \cs{box0}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \setbox0=\vsplit\txtbkb@xt@p to \dimen0
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The new bottom (which will overflow to the next page) is the content
+% we clipped off bottom of \cs{txtbkb@xt@p} and the original overflow
+% material still in \cs{txtbkb@xb@t}.
+% \changes{v4.6}{2016/01/18}{Removed \cs{vfil} between unboxing, this allows
+% correct breaking of margin content across pages.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \global\setbox\txtbkb@xb@t=\vbox{%
+            \unvbox\txtbkb@xt@p\unvbox\txtbkb@xb@t}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We then patch everything together the new top
+% is in \cs{txtbkb@xt@p} the new top is in \cs{@tempboxa} followed by
+% \cs{tbBotMargin} (in \cs{box}\cs{txtbkb@xh@ld}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \global\setbox\txtbkb@xt@p=\vbox{\unvbox0
+            \vfill\vskip\tbminskipbtnlayers
+            \vfil\unvbox2\relax}\egroup
+    \fi
+    \ifodd\value{page}%
+        \put(\@oddllx,\@oddlly){%
+            \eqe@MarParBox{\unvbox\txtbkb@xt@p}}\else
+        \put(\@evenllx,\@evenlly){%
+            \eqe@MarParBox{\unvbox\txtbkb@xt@p}}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We see if there is any carry over, if yes, we insert into
+% \cs{txtbkt@ks} for use on the next page, along with a heading,
+% if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\txtbkt@ks={}\ifvoid\txtbkb@xb@t\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We test whether these is a \cs{splitbotmark}, if yes, then we will
+% insert it at the top of the next page with formatting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if!\splitbotmark!\global\let\tb@sbm@exp\relax\else
+        \xdef\tb@sbm@exp{\noexpand\tbPreMarginHeader
+            \noexpand\tbMarginHeaderFmt{\splitbotmark}%
+            \noexpand\tbPostMarginHeader
+            \noexpand\par\kern3pt}%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the content that will be carried over to the next page,
+% we insert a \cs{splitbotmark} if it is non-empty (\cs{tb@tmp@exp}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \global\txtbkt@ks=\expandafter{\tb@sbm@exp
+        \tb@insertCarryOver{\unvbox\txtbkb@xb@t}}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\insertpageifcarryover}
+% This macro is use to generate a blank page if there is carry over from the
+% previous page. It is place just after the exercises, and before a new chapter of section.
+% The optional argument allows you to insert something into the new page, if  one is
+% automatically created. The default is \cs{null}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\insertpageifcarryover}[1][\null]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We begin by starting a new page, the shipout routine of previous page
+% will be initialized and can then get an accurate result for
+% \cs{ifiscarryover}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \newpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If there is carryover, we create a new page by inserting
+% a content into the page.  If there is no carry over, we do
+% now insert any content, and the page will not be created.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifiscarryover\def\eqeifnext{\csname iftrue\endcsname}%
+    \PackageInfo{eqexam}{Carry over of content in margin
+    from page \thepage.\MessageBreak Creating a blank page}\else
+    \def\eqeifnext{\csname iffalse\endcsname}\fi\eqeifnext#1\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\setFullWidthHeader}
+% Makes the running header full width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setFullWidthHeader}{%
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{%
+        \evensidemargin+\tbmarparboxwidth+\marginparsep}%
+    \edef\@headoffset{\the\@tempdima}%
+    \def\@evenhead{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[0pt][l]
+        {\thepage}\hspace{\@headoffset}}\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+    \ifmarginsonleft
+        \def\@oddhead{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[0pt][l]
+            {\slshape\rightmark}\hspace{\@headoffset}}\hfil\thepage}%
+    \else
+        \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\makebox[0pt]
+            {\hspace{\@headoffset}\makebox[0pt][r]{\thepage}}}%
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{In support of solutions at end of document and chapter}
+%
+% A feature that may not be used much is to have solutions at the end of each chapter.
+%    \begin{macro}{\chaptersolutions}
+% If \cs{tb@EndOfChapterExercises} is executed, and
+% \cs{chaptersolutions} is placed between chapters, we can generate
+% solutions at the end of the chapters, instead of at the end of the book.
+% \cs{chaptersolutions} is \cs{let} to \cs{relax} unless
+% \cs{tb@EndOfChapterExercises} is executed. In this case
+% \cs{chaptersolutions} inputs the the \texttt{.sol} file, then
+% then opens it
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifchapterexercises \chapterexercisesfalse
+\let\chaptersolutions\relax
+\def\tb@EndOfChapterExercises{%
+    \let\include@solutions@chapter\include@solutions
+    \def\includeexersolutions{%
+        \include@solutions@chapter
+          \global\let\include@solutions\relax
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{chaptersolutions} is redefined from \cs{relax}. Input current solutions,
+% close stream, open stream.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\chaptersolutions{%
+        \includeexersolutions
+        \immediate\closeout\ex@solns
+        \newwrite \ex@solns \global\let\quiz@solns\ex@solns
+        \immediate\openout \ex@solns \jobname.sol
+        \ifvspacewithsolns\writeAllAnsAtEnd\fi
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\writeallsolutions{\let\chaptersolutions\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\exercisesAtEndOfChapter}
+% If you want solutions at the end of each chapter, you'll have to
+% execute this command in the preamble. See \cs{initChapAfterSolns} for an
+% example of usage.
+%    \begin{environment}{afterChapSolns}
+% This comment environment is a convenience for placing content between
+% chapters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\excludecomment{afterChapSolns}
+%\includecomment{solnsAtEnd}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2014/05/08) There is a problem with nested comment environments when \texttt{solnsAtEnd}
+% contains within it the \cs{includeexersolutions} command, especially when
+% \texttt{multicols} is used. The fix seems to redefine things so that
+% \texttt{solnsAtEnd} writes to a different CUT file
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NewCommentCutFile{\def\CommentCutFile{solnsAtEnd.cut}}
+\def\RestoreCommentCutFile{\def\CommentCutFile{comment.cut}}
+\@ifundefined{BeforeIncludedComment}{%
+\long\def\solnsAtEndcomment
+ #1{\message{Special comment '#1'}%
+    \csarg\def{#1}{\endgroup  \message{Processing '#1' comment.}%
+                   \NewCommentCutFile\SetUpCutFile
+                   % #2 before SetUp, so we can do renaming.
+          \message{Comment '#1' writing to \CommentCutFile.}%
+          \ProcessComment{#1}}%
+    \csarg\def{After#1Comment}{\immediate\closeout\CommentStream
+        \RestoreCommentCutFile\input{solnsAtEnd.cut}\relax}%
+    \CommentEndDef{#1}}
+}{\long\def\solnsAtEndcomment
+ #1{\message{Special comment '#1'}%
+    \csarg\def{After#1Comment}{\immediate\closeout\CommentStream
+    \RestoreCommentCutFile\input{solnsAtEnd.cut}\relax}%
+    \csarg\def{#1}{\NewCommentCutFile\BeforeIncludedComment\relax
+          \ProcessComment{#1}}%
+    \CommentEndDef{#1}}
+ }
+\solnsAtEndcomment{solnsAtEnd}
+\newcommand{\exercisesAtEndOfChapter}{%
+    \ifeq@nosolutions\else
+        \typeout{^^J!!!!!Executing in chapter solutions!!!!!^^J}
+        \chapterexercisestrue\tb@EndOfChapterExercises
+        \ifchapterexercises
+        \csarg\let{solnsAtEnd}\@gobble
+        \excludecomment{solnsAtEnd}%
+        \csarg\let{AftersolnsAtEndComment}\relax
+        \includecomment{afterChapSolns}\else
+        \excludecomment{afterChapSolns}\fi
+    \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\exercisesAtEndOfChapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \subsection{Modifying and restoring the Layout}
+% The book may need a wide page format and use multi-columns to display homework sets, or
+% solutions at the end if the book.
+%    \begin{macro}{\setFullWidthLayout}
+% A command to set the page layout for the solutions in the back of the book. Typically,
+% we do away with the wide margins. We also save the current values of the parameters
+% we are changing so we can restore them later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setFullWidthLayout}{%
+    \saveBasicLayoutParams
+    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0in}%
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}%
+    \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth-2in}%
+    \setlength{\linewidth}{\paperwidth-2in}%
+    \setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}%
+    \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+    \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{fullwidthtext}
+% When \cs{setFullWidthLayout} is in effect, we have the problem of writing text.
+% Originally, I used a \cs{parbox} with width of \cs{linewidth}, but this has it problems
+% when breaking across pages. We have instead an environment for writing; the list environment
+% obeys the current \cs{linewidth}, which is set to \cs{paperwidth-2in}, this latter value
+% may not always be correct (especially when the margins are smaller than 2in.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{fullwidthtext}{%
+\begin{list}{}{%
+    \setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}%
+    \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}\setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}
+}\item\relax}{\end{list}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\restorePageLayout}
+% Restore the last saved page parameters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\restorePageLayout}{\newpage
+    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\tb@osms}
+    \setlength\evensidemargin{\tb@esms}
+    \setlength{\textwidth}{\tb@tws}
+    \setlength{\linewidth}{\tb@lws}
+    \setlength{\columnseprule}{\tb@csr}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Used by \cs{setFullWidthLayout} just before the page layout parameters are changed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\saveBasicLayoutParams}{%
+    \xdef\tb@osms{\the\oddsidemargin}%
+    \xdef\tb@esms{\the\evensidemargin}%
+    \xdef\tb@tws{\the\textwidth}%
+    \xdef\tb@lws{\the\linewidth}%
+    \xdef\tb@csr{\the\columnseprule}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\initChapAfterSolns}
+% Initializes the environment when solutions appear after each chapter.
+% Example of usage, taken from fortextbook.ltx,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{afterChapSolns}
+%\initChapAfterSolns
+%\section{Solutions to Chapter Exercises}
+%\begin{fullwidthtext}
+%We present short solutions to the problems.
+%We present short solutions to the problems.
+%We present short solutions to the problems.
+%We present short solutions to the problems.
+%\end{fullwidthtext}
+%\bigskip
+%\begin{multicols}{2}\forceNoColor
+%\chaptersolutions
+%\end{multicols}
+%\restoreFromChapAfterSolns
+%\end{afterChapSolns}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\initChapAfterSolns}{\newpage
+    \clearTopMargin\clearBotMargin
+    \setFullWidthLayout
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\restoreFromChapAfterSolns}
+% Restores the saved parameters at the end of the chapter solutions, see
+% above for an example.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\restoreFromChapAfterSolns}{\newpage
+    \restorePageLayout\setFullWidthHeader
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</textbook>
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{We shipout in support of \texttt{fortextbook}}
+% We shipout \cs{eqe@tb@shipout} to be placed in the margins on every page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifeqfortextbook
+\AtBeginDocument{\tb@soln@choice
+    \ifeqwritetomargins\chkmarginboxwidth
+    \AddToShipoutPicture{\eqe@tb@shipout}\fi}
+\fi
+%</package>
+%<*textbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Modify \texttt{eqequestions} environment}
+%
+% We adjust the \texttt{eqequestions} environment to minimize spacing between problems.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\eqequestopsep{0pt}
+\eqequesparsep{0pt}
+\eqequesitemsep{0pt}
+\eqequeslistparindent{0pt}
+\renewenvironment{eqequestions}{%
+    \begin{list}{}{%
+    \ifwithsoldoc\let\solnItemMngt\eqeSolnItemMngt\fi
+    \setlength{\labelwidth}{\eqemargin}%
+    \setlength{\parsep}{\eqeques@parsep}%
+    \setlength{\itemsep}{\eqeques@itemsep}
+    \setlength{\topsep}{\eqeques@topsep}%
+    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
+    \setlength{\listparindent}{\eqeques@listparindent}%dps%
+    \ifwithsoldoc\settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@hspannerSoln}\else
+    \settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@hspannerPrb}\fi
+    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+    }\ifwithsoldoc\global\firstitemtrue\fi\item\relax}{\end{list}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{eqepartsquestions}
+% This environment is used in the SOL file with problems with parts to hang indent
+% the solutions with parts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqepquestopsep}[1]{\def\eqepques@topsep{#1}}
+\newcommand{\eqepquesparsep}[1]{\def\eqepques@parsep{#1}}
+\newcommand{\eqepquesitemsep}[1]{\def\eqepques@itemsep{#1}}
+\eqepquestopsep{\eqeques@itemsep}
+\eqepquesparsep{\eqeques@parsep}
+\eqepquesitemsep{\eqeques@itemsep}
+\newenvironment{eqepartsquestions}{%
+    \begin{list}{}{%
+    \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\eqe@prtsepSoln\hspace{\tbsolnpartwdth}}
+    \setlength{\parsep}{\eqepques@parsep}%
+    \setlength{\itemsep}{\eqepques@itemsep}%
+    \setlength{\topsep}{\eqepques@topsep}%
+    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
+    \settowidth{\labelsep}{\eqe@hspannerSoln}
+    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+    }\item\relax}{\end{list}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Modifications for solutions page}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\gobbletoEndEXt} is a command to gobble all content from the current position \cs{eqEXt}
+% down to \cs{endeqEXt}. In the solutions file ends with \cs{par}\cs{medskip}, which
+% we gobble up too. We define \DescribeMacro{\eqExtArg}\cs{eqExtArg} to \cs{thequestionno} so we can use the problem
+% number to filter out the even-problems.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\gobbletoEndEXt#1\endeqEXt{\@gobbletwo}
+\def\eqExtArg{\theeqquestionnoi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if\load@exerquiz\eqe@NO\DoNotFitItIn\fi
+\let\fillInFormatDefault\@empty
+\def\exerSolnsHeadnToc{}
+\renewcommand{\exerSolnInput}{%
+    \let\webnewpage\relax
+    \ifsolutionsonly\else\immediate\closeout\ex@solns\fi
+    \ifeq@nosolutions\else\newpage % 2012-03-14
+        \iftherearesolutions\eq@solutionshook\eqsolutionshook
+            \ifsolutionsonly\else\newpage\eq@solutionshook
+            \eqsolutionshook\fi
+            \ifx\webnewpage\relax
+                \def\webnewpage{\let\webnewpage\newpage}%
+            \fi
+            \priorexsectitle\exerSolnsHeadnToc\priorexslinput
+            \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.sol}{}{\PackageWarning{exerquiz}
+            {!!! Solutions to exercises not found}}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\eqedsplyOnlyFrst}
+% The default listing of a problem with multiple parts is to typeset
+% \texttt{<num>.}~\texttt{(<part>)}. Here, we do not typeset the number after
+% the first time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{partno}{1}\edef\firstPartLtr{\thepartno}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% ???? 6/2/11 When part (a) is hidden we need to generate the questions number
+% for the the first non-hidden part. Created \cs{iffrstProbNumShown} to help
+% but it not working yet.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iffrstProbNumShown\frstProbNumShownfalse
+\def\tb@insertDecPoint{\ifwithsoldoc\eqedecPointSoln\else
+    \eqe@decPointMrg\fi}
+\newcommand{\eqedsplyOnlyFrst}[2]{\def\thisPart{#2}%
+    \ifx\thisPart\firstPartLtr\global\frstProbNumShowntrue
+        \tb@mrgDigitFmt{#1}\tb@insertDecPoint\else
+        \iffrstProbNumShown\tb@GenProbNum{#1}\else
+        \global\frstProbNumShowntrue\tb@mrgDigitFmt{#1}%
+        \tb@insertDecPoint\fi\fi\global\eqeGenProbNumfalse
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\displayProbNumOnce}
+% If a part is carried over to the next page, it may be necessary to manually
+% force the display of the first digit.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\insMidMarg{\displayProbNumOnce}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifeqeGenProbNum \eqeGenProbNumfalse
+\newcommand{\displayProbNumOnce}{\global\eqeGenProbNumtrue} %
+%\def\tb@GenProbNum#1{\ifeqeGenProbNum#1\eqe@decPointMrg\else
+\def\tb@GenProbNum#1{\ifeqeGenProbNum#1\tb@insertDecPoint\else
+    \phantom{#1\tb@insertDecPoint}\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sq@priorhook{\medskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Adjustments of spacing between problems \cs{eqexerskip}, and the check for enough
+% room for the next problem.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\default@fvsizeskip{.1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The skip prior to the beginning of an exercise
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\aboveexskip{0pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The skip after the end of an exercise
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\belowexskip{0pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The skip in the solutions file following an exercise OR a part of an exercise
+% The text of this command should be a single token, that's why I've enclosed
+% it in braces. (There is a \cs{@gobbletwo} that gobbles it up for the \texttt{studented} option.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\belowexsolnskip{{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We remove the \cs{mark} from this definition, see original definition in \texttt{eqexam.def}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\exerSolnHeader[3]{%
+    \ifeqforpaper\else\webnewpage\fi%\par
+    \noindent\@ifundefined{hypertarget}
+    {#3}{\hypertarget{#2}{#3}\relax}\solnhspace
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This causes the \texttt{eqexam} environment to write the user friendly name of the exam
+% even if there is only one exam.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nNumberOfP@rts{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Some Convenience/Formatting Commands}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\preExamSolnHead}
+%    \begin{macro}{\examSolnHeadFmt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\postExamSolnHead}
+% These are redefinitions of commands defined in \texttt{eqexam},
+% They control the vertical spacing before and after a heading in the
+% solutions at the end of the book, as well as the formatting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\preExamSolnHead}{\medbreak\noindent}
+\renewcommand{\examSolnHeadFmt}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
+\renewcommand{\postExamSolnHead}{\smallskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\wrtChapSolnHead}
+% Writes a chapter heading to the solution file, usage,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\wrtChapSolnHead{The New {\eqexam}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\wrtChapSolnHead}[1]{%
+    \writeToSolnFile{%
+    \protect\preChapSolnHead
+    \protect\chapHeadSolnFmt{\protect\ftbFmtChapter{\thechapter}#1}%
+    \protect\postChapSolnHead
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\preChapSolnHead}
+%    \begin{macro}{\chapHeadSolnFmt}
+%    \begin{macro}{\postChapSolnHead}
+% Same as above, except for chapter headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\preChapSolnHead}{\bigbreak\noindent}
+\newcommand{\chapHeadSolnFmt}[1]{{\large\textbf{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\postChapSolnHead}{\medbreak}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\ftbFmtChapter}
+% This command may (optionally) insert the chapter number into the chapter title passed
+% to \cs{wrtChapSolnHead}. The default is to pass the chapter name (``Chapter'') and chapter number.
+% If you say \verb!\let\ftbFmtChapter\@gobble!, the chapter name and number will not appear.
+% You can redefine this command as desired.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ftbFmtChapter}[1]{\chaptername\space#1.\space\ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In the solution manual, all these
+%chapter commands may be redefined like so
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\let\preChapSolnHead\relax
+%\let\chapHeadSolnFmt\chapter
+%\let\ftbFmtChapter\@gobble
+%\let\postChapSolnHead\relax
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In fact, let's make this into a command.
+%    \begin{macro}{\convertChapHeadToChapters}
+%In the solutions manual, the chapter headings will become chapters of the manual, rather than
+%just a bold faced heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\convertChapHeadToChapters}{%
+    \let\preChapSolnHead\relax
+    \let\chapHeadSolnFmt\chapter
+    \let\ftbFmtChapter\@gobble
+    \let\postChapSolnHead\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\probSet}
+% A simple command to announce the problem set.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\subsection*{\probSet{\thesection}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% See also the definition for the \texttt{probset} environment below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\probSet}[1]{Problem Set #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\annotPage}
+% Use to annotation the page number onto a solution heading, for example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{exam}[\thesection. Another Section\annotPage]{\autoExamName}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% or using the \texttt{probset} environment defined below
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{probset}{{\thesection} Setting the page layout\annotPage}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\annotPage}{\protect\annotThePage{\thepage}}
+\newcommand{\annotThePage}[1]{\space(page\protect~#1)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% \subsection{The \texttt{probset} and \texttt{example} environments}
+% We define two environments based. The first (\texttt{probset}) is based on the
+% \texttt{exam} environment; the second (example) is based on the \texttt{exercise} environment.
+%    \begin{environment}{probset}
+% A convenience environment, it is the \texttt{exam} environment, renamed, with
+% different arguments. \texttt{\#1} is the heading that will appear in the margins,
+% and \texttt{\#2} is the heading to appear in the back of the book.
+%\changes{v3.0n}{2011/09/18}{Added an \cs{edef} in case \cs{thesection} does not get
+% expanded early enough to display correctly in the margins.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\noProbHeader{NPH}
+\newenvironment{probset}[2][\probSet{\thesection}]{%
+    \exam[#2]{\autoExamName}\ifx#1\noProbHeader\else
+    \protected@edef\ftb@tmp@exp{\noexpand\insProbHead{#1}}%
+    \ftb@tmp@exp\fi}{\endexam}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{exampleno}[section]
+\renewcommand{\theexampleno}{\arabic{section}.\arabic{exampleno}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \textbf{Note:} The counter is \texttt{exampleno} and is designed to show the section
+% number and example number, and to reset at each section. To change the definition
+% of \cs{theexampleno} to reflect the chapter number followed by the example number, and
+% resetting at the beginning of each new chapter, the following code is needed.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage{remreset}
+%\@removefromreset{exampleno}{section}
+%\renewcommand{\theexampleno}{\arabic{chapter}.\arabic{exampleno}}
+%\@addtoreset{exampleno}{chapter}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\DescribeMacro{\examplenoname} is the label placed on the example.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\examplenoname}{Example}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{environment}{example}
+% A simple example environment, based on the \texttt{exercise} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{example}{%\medskip
+    \belowexskip{\medskipamount}\aboveexskip{\medskipamount}%
+    \makeRoomForProb{\@nbaselineskip\baselineskip}{}%
+    \renewcommand\exlabel{Example}%
+    \renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel~\theexampleno.}}%
+    \let\eq@fititin\eqfititin
+    \renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}%
+    \def\eqexheader@wrapper{\eqexheader}%
+    \SolutionsAfter
+    \begin{exercise}[exampleno]}{\end{exercise}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+%    \begin{environment}{example*}
+% An example environment with parts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{example*}{%\medskip
+    \belowexskip{\medskipamount}\aboveexskip{\medskipamount}%
+    \makeRoomForProb{\@nbaselineskip\baselineskip}{}%
+    \renewcommand\exlabel{Example}%
+    \renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel~\theexampleno.}}%
+    \let\eq@fititin\eqfititin
+    \renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}%
+    \def\eqexheader@wrapper{\eqexheader}%
+    \SolutionsAfter
+    \begin{exercise*}[exampleno]}{\end{exercise*}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{environment}
+% We set some parameters, to values better suited for the option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setDefaultfvsizeskip{.1}
+\nbaselineskip{4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Commands in support of Solution Manuals}
+% Generally, the solution manual source file should have the same
+% packages as the source file for the book itself, perhaps with a few exceptions,
+% but definitely the \textsf{eqexam} package is required with its \texttt{fortextbook} option.
+%
+% At this time, we provide only two commands, these are \cs{ftbInputBookAux} and
+% \cs{ftbInputSolnFiles}.
+%    \begin{macro}{\ftbInputBookAux}
+% This command is used to input the auxiliary files of the master source file. It takes
+% one argument, the name of the master source file (\texttt{myBook.ltx} or \texttt{myBook.tex}).
+% If the extension is not present, it is assumed to be \texttt{.tex}.
+%\changes{v3.0f}{2011/08/13}{Added \cs{ftbInputBookAux} to support solution manual}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ftbInputBookAux}[1]{%
+    \filename@parse{#1}\@ifundefined{filename@ext}%
+        {\def\filename@ext{tex}}{}%
+    \xdef\tbBaseName{\filename@base}%
+    \xdef\tbSourceFile{\filename@base.\filename@ext}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In the next 4 lines, we save \cs{@writefile} and \cs{@setckpt}, and \cs{let}
+% them to \cs{@gobbletwo}. We restore their definitions after we input the aux files.
+% We include the aux files of the source file in case there are some cross references
+% in the solution files, or the body of the text would like to refer back to the
+% original book. (Seems unlikely.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\save@writefile\@writefile
+    \let\@writefile\@gobbletwo
+    \let\save@setckpt\@setckpt
+    \let\@setckpt\@gobbletwo
+    \makeatletter
+    \InputIfFileExists{\tbBaseName.aux}{%
+        \PackageInfo{eqexam}
+            {Inputting auxiliary files of\MessageBreak\tbSourceFile}%
+        }{%
+        \PackageError{eqexam}
+            {Auxiliary files for \tbSourceFile\space were not found}
+            {Compile the source file \tbSourceFile\space
+                three times\MessageBreak%
+                to create the required auxiliary files.}%
+        }%
+    \makeatother
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The solution files really shouldn't have a label, but if we do
+% we'll save the {\LaTeX} definition of \cs{label}, and \cs{let}
+% it two \cs{@gobble}. Within the body of the solutions, the
+% command \cs{ftblabel} may be used to cross reference, if needed.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\let\ftblabel\label
+    \let\label\@gobble
+    \let\@writefile\save@writefile
+    \let\@setckpt\save@setckpt
+}
+\@onlypreamble\ftbInputBookAux
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{\restorelabel}
+%    \begin{macro}{\gobblelabel}
+% These two are used to restore the usual definition of \cs{label}, and to
+% cancel it out by letting it to \cs{@gobble}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\restorelabel}{\global\let\label\ftblabel}
+\newcommand{\gobblelabel}{\let\label\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\ftbInputSolnFiles}
+% In the body of the text, place \cs{ftbInputSolnFiles} in vertical mode.
+% This will input the \texttt{.sol} file of the master source document.
+% The optional argument is the name of the solution file. The default name
+% is \verb!\tbBaseName.sol!, where \cs{tbBaseName} was defined in
+% \cs{ftbInputBookAux}. If no extension is specified, an extension of \texttt{.sol}
+% is assumed.  The original \texttt{.sol} may have changed its name, if someone
+% renamed it (to keep it from being overwritten). The solution file may be editing (by hand)
+% as needed.
+%\changes{v3.0f}{2011/08/13}{Added \cs{ftbInputSolnFiles} to support solution manual}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ftbInputSolnFiles}[1][\tbBaseName.sol]{%
+    \filename@parse{#1}\@ifundefined{filename@ext}%
+        {\def\filename@ext{sol}}{}%
+    \xdef\tbBaseName{\filename@base}%
+    \xdef\tbSourceFile{\filename@base.\filename@ext}%
+    \InputIfFileExists{\tbBaseName.sol}{%
+        \PackageInfo{eqexam}
+            {Inputting solutions file \tbBaseName.sol\MessageBreak}%
+        }{%
+        \PackageError{eqexam}
+            {Solutions file for \tbSourceFile\space was not found}%
+            {Compile the source files three times}%
+        }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</textbook>
+%<*ftbsty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{\textsf{fortextbook} Style File}\label{fortextbookstyle}
+% One person said it would be nice to separate \textsf{eqexam} from the \texttt{fortextbook} option, and
+% have \textsf{fortextbook} as a \texttt{separate} style (package). Rather than spending tens of hours separating them
+% I create a simple ``wrapper'' package, which simply calls \textsf{eqexam} with the \texttt{fortextook} option along
+% with all the recommended options.
+%\changes{v3.0p}{2011/09/22}{Added the wrapper package fortextbook.}
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+% \textbf{Usage:}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass[twoside,letterpaper]{book}
+%\usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath}
+%\usepackage{fortextbook}
+%...
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Below is the style.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{fortextbook}
+ [2012/03/14 v1.0 A fortextbook Package (dps)]
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{eqexam}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage[%
+    ftbsolns,fortextbook,usecustomdesign,
+    forcolorpaper,noseparationrule,usexkv
+]{eqexam}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In support of this style, I've also defined \cs{NoSolutions} to compile the document
+% without creating the solutions at the end of the file (this reduces the amount if IO
+% when compiling). I've also defined a special option \texttt{nocustomdesign} which
+% cancels out the \texttt{usecustomdesign} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ftbsty>
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{center}
+%   \rule{.67\linewidth}{.4pt}
+% \end{center}
+% \paragraph*{Input \texttt{eqtextb.def}.}
+% Back in the main package, we choose this point to input the
+% \texttt{fortextbook} code (\texttt{eqtextb.def}) if the
+% \texttt{fortextbook} option is taken.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\ftbInputEqTextb{\ifeqfortextbook\noexpand
+    \InputIfFileExists{eqtextb.def}{}{}\fi}
+\ftbInputEqTextb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{center}
+%   \rule{.67\linewidth}{.4pt}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \section{\textsf{xkeyval} Extensions}
+%
+% We load this material if \textsf{xkeyval} exists, and if the document author has specified
+% the \texttt{usexkv} option.
+%
+% \texttt{2014/12/19} Now, the \texttt{usexkeys} is on by default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\IfFileExists{xkeyval}{%
+%    \if\eq@usexkeys\eqe@YES\RequirePackage{xkeyval}\else
+%    \endinput\fi}{\endinput}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We redefine selected commands if the user has specified the \texttt{usexkv} option.
+%
+%\paragraph*{New options for \cs{fillin}}
+%    \begin{macro}{underline}
+% Underline the fillin
+%    \begin{macro}{u,b}
+% Legacy parameters, underlines (\texttt{u}) or leaves a blank space (\texttt{b})
+%    \begin{macro}{boxed}
+% Boxes in the response region
+%    \begin{macro}{boxpretext}
+% When boxed is use, use this to insert text in front of the answer, for example, \texttt{x=}
+%    \begin{macro}{boxsize}
+% When boxed is taken, use boxsize to set the size of the box; permissible choices are
+% tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, LARGE, huge, Huge
+%    \begin{macro}{align}
+% Align the answer within the response region, permissible values are \texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, \texttt{r}.
+%    \begin{macro}{color}
+% The color of the response (named color)
+%    \begin{macro}{format}
+% Special formatting for the answer, the default is \cs{bfseries}
+%    \begin{macro}{enclosesoln}
+% This Boolean key only takes effect when the
+%      \texttt{boxed} key is used, and when either the \texttt{nosolutions} or the
+%      \texttt{vspacewithsolns} option is taken. When these conditions are
+%      met, a box is created around the solution (the third parameter of \cs{fillin}); the solution
+%      is enclosed in a \cs{phantom} so it is not seen, but the dimensions of the solution are used.
+%      This key allows you to create a box or arbitrary dimension.
+%\changes{v2.0j}{2011/04/19}{added the \texttt{enclosesoln} key to \texttt{eqFillin} family.}
+%    \begin{macro}{fitwidth}
+%\changes{v3.0i}{2011/08/18}{added the \texttt{fitwidth} key to \texttt{eqFillin} family.}
+% The \texttt{fitwidth} option uses the natural width of the answer to create the fillin
+% when the \texttt{answerkey} option is in effect; otherwise it uses the second parameter \texttt{\#2}.
+%    \begin{macro}{parbox}
+%    The \texttt{parbox} parameter may be used to create a multiline \cs{fillin}
+%    box. The value of \texttt{parbox} is the same as the first three parameters
+%    of the {\LaTeX} command \cs{parbox}, e.g., \verb!parbox={[t][.5in][t]}!.
+%    The value needs to be enclosed in braces.
+% \changes{v3.0w}{2012/03/27}{Added \texttt{parbox}}%
+%    \begin{macro}{hiddenbox}
+%    When the \texttt{boxed} option is used, this option resets the \cs{fbox}
+%    parameters to \texttt{0pt}, making the box ``hidden.''
+%\changes{v3.0w}{2012/03/27}{Added \texttt{hiddenbox} options}
+%\par\medskip\noindent
+% Below are the \textsf{xkeyval} definitions of the keys recognized by \cs{fillin}.
+%\changes{v4.5a}{2015/11/10}{Added some logic to the underline key}
+% Add some logic to the \texttt{underline} key, now it is equivalent to the
+% \texttt{b} key.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey{eqFillin}{underline}[true]{}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{u}[]{\KV@eqFillin@underlinetrue}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{b}[]{\KV@eqFillin@underlinefalse}
+\define@boolkey{eqFillin}{boxed}[true]{}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{boxpretext}[]{\def\eq@fillintext{#1}}
+\let\eq@fillintext\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the user just says \texttt{parbox,...} the value of
+%    \cs{eq@fillinparbox} is \cs{relax}. If \texttt{parbox}
+%    does not appear in the option list, \cs{eq@fillinparbox}
+%    has a default value of \cs{@empty}. In this way, we can
+%    distinguish between \texttt{parbox} with the empty value,
+%    and \texttt{parbox} not present at all.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{parbox}[\relax]{\def\eq@fillinparbox{#1}}
+\let\eq@fillinparbox\@empty
+\define@key{eqFillin}{hiddenbox}[]{%
+    \def\eq@fillinhiddenbox{%
+        \setlength{\fboxrule}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}}}
+\let\eq@fillinhiddenbox\@empty
+\define@boolkey{eqFillin}{enclosesoln}[true]{}
+\define@choicekey+{eqFillin}{boxsize}{tiny,scriptsize,footnotesize,%
+    small,normalsize,large,Large,LARGE,huge,Huge}[normalsize]{%
+    \def\eq@eqFillin@boxsize{\text{\csname#1\endcsname\strut}}%
+}{\PackageWarning{eqexam}{Bad choice for boxsize, permissible values
+    are tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize,
+    large, Large, LARGE, huge and Huge. Try again}}
+\def\eq@eqFillin@boxsize{\text{\normalsize\strut}}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{color}[\eq@fillinColor]{\edef\eq@fillin@color{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.0x}{2012/04/03}{Added \cs{eqe@align@hfill} to \texttt{align} property.
+% used to set position of content when \texttt{parbox} is used.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{eqFillin}{align}[\val\nr]%
+    {l,r,c}[\eq@eqFillin@align@default]{%
+    \def\eq@eqFillin@align{#1}%
+    \ifcase\nr\relax
+        \def\eqe@align@hfill{}\or
+        \def\eqe@align@hfill{\hfill}\or
+        \def\eqe@align@hfill{\hfil}\fi
+    }{%
+    \PackageWarning{eqexam}{Bad choice for align, permissible values
+    are l, r, and c. Try again}}
+\let\eqe@align@hfill\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{defaultalign} is used to change the values of the default macros
+% \cs{eq@eqFillin@align@default} and \cs{eqe@align@hfill@default} for the \texttt{align} key together.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{eqFillin}{defaultalign}[\val\nr]{l,r,c}[c]{%
+    \def\eq@eqFillin@align@default{#1}%
+    \ifcase\nr\relax
+        \def\eqe@align@hfill@default{}\or
+        \def\eqe@align@hfill@default{\hfill}\or
+        \def\eqe@align@hfill@default{\hfil}\fi
+    }{%
+    \PackageWarning{eqexam}{Bad choice for defaultalign, permissible
+    values are l, r, and c. Try again}}
+\setkeys{eqFillin}{defaultalign=c}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{\fillInFormatDefault} is the default fill-in format
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\fillInFormatDefault}{\normalfont}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{format}[\fillInFormatDefault]{%
+    \def\eq@fillin@format{#1}}
+\def\eq@fillin@format{\bfseries}
+\def\eqe@fbox@corr#1{#1-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule}
+\define@boolkey{eqFillin}{fitwidth}[true]{} %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{boxcmd}
+% The \texttt{boxcmd} key is used to define a boxing command. The default
+% is either \cs{boxed} or \cs{fbox}. You can say
+% |boxcmd={\fboxcolor{blue}{yellow}}| to obtain a box with a blue frame
+% and yellow background.
+%\changes{v3.1c}{2012/07/30}{Added boxcmd to \cs{fillin}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{boxed}{%
+        \def\eq@fillin@defaultbox{\fbox}%
+        \def\eq@fillin@boxcmd{\fbox}%
+    }{%
+        \def\eq@fillin@defaultbox{\boxed}%
+        \def\eq@fillin@boxcmd{\boxed}%
+    }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macro}{ulcmd}
+% The \texttt{ulcmd} key is used to define a underlining command. The default
+% is either \texttt{underline} or \texttt{underbar}. You can say
+% |ulcmd=underline| to obtained an underline using \cs{underline}.
+%\changes{v3.1c}{2012/07/30}{Added ulcmd to \cs{fillin}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{boxcmd}%
+    [\eq@fillin@defaultbox]{\def\eq@fillin@boxcmd{#1}}
+\@ifundefined{underbar}{%
+        \def\eq@fillin@defaultul{underline}%
+        \def\eq@fillin@ulcmd{\underline}%
+    }{%
+        \def\eq@fillin@defaultul{underbar}%
+        \def\eq@fillin@ulcmd{\underbar}%
+    }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    (2017/01/28) Added custom underline option, the author must define \cs{ulcustom} and specify
+%    \texttt{ulcmd=custom}.
+%    \changes{v4.6c}{2017/01/28}{added custom underline option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\ulcustom{\expandafter\noexpand\eq@fillin@ulcmd}
+\edef\temp@exp{\noexpand
+\define@choicekey+{eqFillin}{ulcmd}
+    {underbar,underline,custom}[\eq@fillin@defaultul]}
+\temp@exp{\def\@rgi{#1}\def\eq@custom{custom}\ifx\@rgi\eq@custom
+    \def\eq@fillin@ulcmd{\@nameuse{ulcustom}}\else
+    \def\eq@fillin@ulcmd{\@nameuse{#1}}\fi
+}{\PackageWarning{aeb}{Bad choice for ulcmd, permissible values
+   are underbar and underline. Try again}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2013/02/16) \DescribeMacro{lift}\texttt{lift} lifts (actually lowers) the underline by the amount specified.
+% \DescribeMacro{autolift}\texttt{autolift} measures the depth of the content and lifts
+% (actually lowers) the underline by that amount. \DescribeMacro{addtoautolift}\texttt{addtoautolift}
+% works with \texttt{autolift} to add the specified amount to the amount of lift as calculated
+% by \texttt{autolift}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{eqFillin}{lift}[-1sp]{\def\eq@fillin@lift{#1}}
+\define@boolkey{eqFillin}{autolift}[true]{} %
+\define@key{eqFillin}{addtoautolift}[0pt]{%
+    \def\eq@fillin@addtoautolift{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    The macro \cs{eqe@getiiiOpts} is based on early parsing code of \cs{parbox}.
+%    It picks up three optional parameters and saves their values under the
+%    commands \cs{eqe@opts@argi}, \cs{eqe@opts@argii}, \cs{eqe@opts@argiii}.
+%    We are interested in \cs{eqe@opts@argiii}, which specifies the depth of
+%    the \cs{parbox}. If the \texttt{boxed} option is taken, we reduce the value
+%    of \cs{eqe@opts@argiii} by \texttt{2\string\fboxsep+2\string\fboxrule} so
+%    that the height will be exactly as specified. The macro \cs{eqe@getiiiOpts}
+%    is used with the \texttt{parbox} option of \cs{fillin}.
+%    The macro \cs{eqe@getiiiOpts} has syntax:
+%\begin{quote}
+%   \cs{eqe@getiiiOpts[\meta{pos}][\meta{height}][\meta{inner-pos}]}
+%\end{quote}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqe@getiiiOpts{%
+    \@ifnextchar[%]
+    \i@eqe@getiiiOpts
+    {\iii@eqe@getiiiOpts{c}{\relax}[s]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Get \meta{pos}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\i@eqe@getiiiOpts[#1]{%
+    \@ifnextchar[%]
+    {\ii@eqe@getiiiOpts{#1}}%
+    {\iii@eqe@getiiiOpts{#1}{\relax}[s]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Get \meta{height}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ii@eqe@getiiiOpts#1[#2]{%
+    \@ifnextchar[%]
+    {\iii@eqe@getiiiOpts{#1}{#2}}%
+    {\iii@eqe@getiiiOpts{#1}{#2}[#1]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Get \meta{inner-pos}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\iii@eqe@getiiiOpts#1#2[#3]{%
+    \def\eqe@opts@argi{#1}%
+    \def\eqe@opts@argii{#2}%
+    \def\eqe@opts@argiii{#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \paragraph*{Redefine the \cs{fillin} command}
+%    \begin{macro}{\fillin}
+%    Re-worked \cs{fillin} to have \textsf{xkeyval} in the optional first parameter.
+%    The syntax is illustrated below.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \fillin[
+%       underline=true|false,u,b,boxed=true|false,boxpretext=<text>,
+%       align=l|r|c,boxsize=\tiny|..\normalsize|\large|...|\Huge,
+%       color=<namedcolor>,format=<\bfseries|\ttfamily|\Large|whatever>
+% ]{<width>}{<ans>}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v4.5}{2015/11/10}{Added \cs{setfillinDefaults}}
+% \DescribeMacro{\setfillinDefaults}\cmd{\setfillinDefaults} sets any default
+% options for \cs{fillin} the document author wants.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setfillinDefaults}[1]{\def\eqe@argi{#1}\ifx\eqe@argi\@empty
+    \let\eqe@setfillinDefaults\@empty\else
+    \def\eqe@setfillinDefaults{#1}\fi}
+\let\eqe@setfillinDefaults\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\fillin}[3][]{\begingroup%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{ifsp@expand} is defined in \textsf{spdef} package. This is a version
+%    if \cs{ifsp} that expands correctly in an \cs{edef}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifsp\csname ifsp@expand\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Get the keys indicated by the document author.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \setkeys{eqFillin}{boxsize,underline=true,boxed=false,%
+    boxpretext,color,format,enclosesoln=false,fitwidth=false,lift,%
+    autolift=false,addtoautolift}%
+    \ifx\eqe@setfillinDefaults\@empty\else
+        \protected@edef\eq@temp@exp{\noexpand
+        \setkeys{eqFillin}{\eqe@setfillinDefaults}}%
+        \eq@temp@exp
+    \fi
+    \protected@edef\eq@temp@exp{\noexpand\setkeys{eqFillin}{#1}}%
+    \eq@temp@exp
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If boxed, we turn underlining off
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed\KV@eqFillin@underlinefalse\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Put \cs{eq@fillin@lift} to \texttt{-2sp} as a signal not to use
+% the \texttt{lift} value in the case the author specified \texttt{autofill}
+% and \texttt{lift}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifKV@eqFillin@autolift\def\eq@fillin@lift{-2sp}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Get the second parameter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\eqe@argii{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We reset \cs{fboxrule} and \cs{fboxsep} as needed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \eq@fillinhiddenbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the document author uses the \texttt{hiddenbox} option,
+%    this option assumes the \texttt{boxed} option as well so we'll
+%    set \cs{KV@eqFillin@boxedtrue} to signal the \texttt{boxed} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eq@fillinhiddenbox\@empty\else
+        \KV@eqFillin@boxedtrue\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the \texttt{parbox} option is taken, we define the third parameter
+%    to be wrapped in a \cs{parbox}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eq@fillinparbox\@empty\def\eqe@argiii{#3}\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \texttt{parbox} is specified, we make \texttt{align=l} the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\eqe@align@hfill\relax
+        \def\eq@eqFillin@align{l}\def\eqe@align@hfill{}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \texttt{parbox} is specified, we get its three optional
+%    parameters so we can manipulate the width parameter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \expandafter\eqe@getiiiOpts\eq@fillinparbox\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now, if this is to be \texttt{boxed}, we reduce the height
+%    of the box (\cs{boxed} increases the height by
+%    \texttt{2\string\fboxrule+2\string\fboxrule}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{eqe@opts@argii} has a value of \cs{relax} if the document author
+%    did not specify a height for the box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \expandafter\ifx\eqe@opts@argii\relax\else
+            \edef\eqe@opts@argii{\expandafter
+                \eqe@fbox@corr\expandafter{\eqe@opts@argii}}\fi
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We need to feed \cs{parbox} the parameters it expects, so, if the
+%    height parameter is not given, we just pass the first argument;
+%    otherwise, we pass all three parameters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \edef\eqe@parboxOptArgs{[\eqe@opts@argi]%
+            \expandafter\ifx\eqe@opts@argii\relax\else
+            [\eqe@opts@argii][\eqe@opts@argiii]\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we build the third parameter, \cs{eqe@argiii}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \def\eqe@argiii{\expandafter\parbox\eqe@parboxOptArgs{\eqe@bw}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We insert \cs{eqe@align@hfill}, which is synchronized to the value of
+%    the \texttt{align} key to move the \cs{parbox} contents to left aligned, centered,
+%    or right aligned. \cs{eqe@align@hfill} will only be effective if \texttt{\#3} is
+%    enclosed in a narrower box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            {\eqe@align@hfill\ifKV@eqFillin@boxed\eq@fillintext\fi#3}}%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cs{eqe@align@hfill} is still equal to \cs{relax}, give it the default
+%    value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eqe@align@hfill\relax
+        \def\eq@eqFillin@align{c}%
+        \edef\eqe@align@hfill{\eqe@align@hfill@default}\fi
+    \ifmmode\let\@eqmath\ensuremath\else\let\@eqmath\text\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We re-calculate the width of the formatted box
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eq@fillinparbox\@empty
+        \ifx\eqe@argii\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If no \texttt{parbox} option and if the second argument is empty,
+%    we set width based on the natural width of \texttt{\#3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \settowidth{\eqetmplengthb}{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format
+            \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed\eq@fillintext\fi\eqe@argiii}}%
+            \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+                \setlength{\eqetmplengthb}{%
+                \eqetmplengthb+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}%
+            \fi
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \texttt{\#2} is nonempty, we use this value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \setlength{\eqetmplengthb}{#2}%
+        \fi
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \texttt{parbox} option with empty second argument, use \cs{linewidth}.
+%    for width
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\eqe@argii\@empty
+            \setlength{\eqetmplengthb}{\linewidth}%
+            \PackageWarning{eqexam}{Parameter \#2
+                is empty with parbox option,\MessageBreak
+                using \string\linewidth\space for width%
+            }%
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \texttt{parbox} option with second argument, use \texttt{\#2}
+%    for width
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \setlength{\eqetmplengthb}{#2}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Return \cs{ifsp} to its default definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifsp\csname ifsp@default\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Save the final calculated width as \cs{eqe@bw}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\eqe@bw{\the\eqetmplengthb}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Set the underline option, \dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifKV@eqFillin@underline\let\@fillinFmt\eq@fillin@ulcmd
+    \else\let\@fillinFmt\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    however, if \texttt{parbox} is specified, we remove the underlining,
+% if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\eq@fillinparbox\@empty\else
+        \ifKV@eqFillin@underline\let\@fillinFmt\relax
+%        \ifx\@fillinFmt\underbar\let\@fillinFmt\relax
+        \PackageInfo{eqexam}{Removing underline option, not permissible
+        \MessageBreak with parbox option}%
+    \fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \paragraph*{Build the \cs{fillin} box.} After the preliminaries, we
+%    create the requested answer field. We begin by building the answer
+%    field for the case of \cs{ifeq@proofing} is true (which occurs when
+%    the \texttt{answerkey} is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifeq@proofing
+        \ifKV@eqFillin@fitwidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the \texttt{fitwidth} option is taken, we measure the width
+%    of the box. Ignored when the \texttt{parbox} option is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \settowidth{\eqetmplengthb}{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format
+                \ifx\eq@fillinparbox\@empty\ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+                    \eq@fillintext\fi\fi\eqe@argiii}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If boxed, we increase the width by
+%    \texttt{2\string\fboxsep+2\string\fboxrule}; when content is \cs{boxed},
+%    the dimensions are reduced.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+                \setlength{\eqetmplengthb}{%
+                \eqetmplengthb+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}%
+            \fi
+            \edef\eqe@bw{\the\eqetmplengthb}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We build the fill-in field for the case of \texttt{boxed}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+            \ifmmode\let\@eqmath\ensuremath\else\let\@eqmath\text\fi
+%            \mbox{\eq@fillin@format\ensuremath{\boxed{%
+            \setbox\z@\hbox{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@boxcmd{%
+%                \eq@fillin@format\ensuremath{\eq@fillin@boxcmd{%
+            \eq@eqFillin@boxsize
+            \@fillinFmt{%
+                \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+                    \edef\eqe@bw{\eqe@fbox@corr{\eqe@bw}}%
+                \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \changes{v2.0h}{2011/04/14}{Modified the calculation of the width
+%    of \cs{fillin}, the width of enclosing box now equals the requested
+%    width}
+%    When the boxed option is taken, we adjust the width of the \cs{makebox}
+%    to get the desired width \texttt{\#2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \makebox[\eqe@bw][\eq@eqFillin@align]{\strut
+                \@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format\color{\eq@fillin@color}%
+                \ifx\eq@fillinparbox\@empty
+                    \eq@fillintext\fi\eqe@argiii}}%
+                }% end \@fillinFmt
+            }}}% end \mbox
+            \setlength{\@tempdima}{\ht0+\dp0}%
+            \xdef\fillinTotalHeight{\the\@tempdima}%
+            \mbox{\unhbox\z@}%
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The content is not to be boxed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifmmode\let\@eqmath\ensuremath\else\let\@eqmath\relax\fi
+            \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A value of \texttt{-1sp} signals that \texttt{lift} has not been specified,
+% nor has \texttt{autofill} been specified. So we use the usual code for underlining.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifdim\eq@fillin@lift=-1sp\relax
+            \@fillinFmt{\makebox[\eqe@bw][\eq@eqFillin@align]{\strut
+                \color{\eq@fillin@color}%
+                \@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format\eqe@argiii}}}%
+            \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2014/02/16) The \texttt{autolift} or \texttt{lift} keys are specified.
+% If \texttt{autofill}, put contents in a box. Set \cs{@tempdima} to
+% \texttt{\cs{dp2}+\cs{eq@fillin@addtoautolift}}, the latter normally has
+% a value of \texttt{0pt} unless specified on the option list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \ifKV@eqFillin@autolift
+                \setbox2=\hbox{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format\eqe@argiii}}%
+                \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dp2+\eq@fillin@addtoautolift}%
+                \edef\eq@fillin@lift{\the\@tempdima}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (2014/02/16) We lower by an amount of \cs{eq@fillin@lift}, but raise the context
+% by that same amount.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \raisebox{-\eq@fillin@lift}{\@fillinFmt{%
+                \makebox[\eqe@bw][\eq@eqFillin@align]{\strut
+                \color{\eq@fillin@color}%
+                \raisebox{\eq@fillin@lift}{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format
+                    \eqe@argiii}}}}}%
+            \fi
+            }\setlength{\@tempdima}{\ht0+\dp0}%
+            \xdef\fillinTotalHeight{\the\@tempdima}%
+            \mbox{\unhbox\z@}%
+        \fi
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We begin the case of not \cs{ifeq@proofing}, that is, the document author
+%    is not compiling with the \texttt{answerkey} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifKV@eqFillin@boxed
+%            \mbox{\eq@fillin@format\ensuremath{\boxed{%
+%            \eq@fillin@format\ensuremath{\eq@fillin@boxcmd{%
+            \setbox\z@\hbox{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format
+                \eq@fillin@boxcmd{\eq@eqFillin@boxsize\ifeq@nosolutions
+                \rlap{\@eqmath{\eq@fillintext}}\fi
+            \ifvspacewithsolns\rlap{\@eqmath{\eq@fillintext}}\fi
+            \@fillinFmt{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We do a similar thing if proofing is not active (\texttt{nosolutions} is taken).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \makebox[\eqe@fbox@corr{\eqe@bw}]{%
+                    \ifKV@eqFillin@enclosesoln\phantom
+                    {\setlength\eqetmplengthb{\eqe@bw-2\fboxsep}%
+                        \edef\eqe@bw{\the\eqetmplengthb}%
+                        \@eqmath{\eqe@argiii}}\else
+                    \strut\hfill\fi
+                }%
+            }%end \@fillinFmt
+            }}}% end \hbox
+            \setlength{\@tempdima}{\ht0+\dp0}%
+            \xdef\fillinTotalHeight{\the\@tempdima}%
+            \mbox{\unhbox\z@}%
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This is the case where the field is \emph{not} boxed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+            \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+            \ifdim\eq@fillin@lift=-1sp\relax
+                \@fillinFmt{\makebox[\eqe@bw]{%
+%                    \phantom{\@eqmath{\eqe@argiii}}
+                    \strut\hfil}}%
+            \else
+                \ifKV@eqFillin@autolift
+                    \setbox2=\hbox{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format
+                        \eqe@argiii}}%
+                    \setlength{\@tempdima}%
+                        {\dp2+\eq@fillin@addtoautolift}%
+                    \edef\eq@fillin@lift{\the\@tempdima}\fi
+                \raisebox{-\eq@fillin@lift}{\@fillinFmt{%
+                    \makebox[\eqe@bw]{\raisebox{\eq@fillin@lift}
+                        {\phantom{\@eqmath{\eq@fillin@format
+                            \eqe@argiii}}\strut\hfil}}}}%
+            \fi
+            }\setlength{\@tempdima}{\ht0+\dp0}%
+            \xdef\fillinTotalHeight{\the\@tempdima}%
+            \mbox{\unhbox\z@}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \paragraph*{Online Code.} If the \texttt{quiz} environment is defined,
+%    and the user has asked for \texttt{online} option we build a text field.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{@quiz}{}{%
+            \if\eq@online\eqe@YES\relax
+                \ifeq@nosolutions
+                    \ifeq@solutionsafter\else
+                        \ifx\eq@insertverticalspace\eqe@YES\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    OK, we get this far if we choose \texttt{online} (or higher) and
+%    if \texttt{nosolutions} (which includes the \texttt{vspacewithsolns}
+%    option). We require \cs{eq@insertverticalspace} to be \texttt{y}.
+%    This last value is the default (\cs{SpaceToWork}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                            \stepcounter{@cntfillin}%
+                            \edef\fieldName{%
+                                \if\probstar*eqexam.\curr@quiz.fillin.%
+                                    \theeqquestionnoi.part\thepartno.%
+                                    fi\the@cntfillin%
+                                \else
+                                    eqexam.\curr@quiz.fillin.%
+                                    \theeqquestionnoi.fi\the@cntfillin%
+                                \fi
+                            }\ifx\eq@fillinparbox\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the \texttt{parbox} option is not taken, we build a text field with height \texttt{11bp}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                            \raisebox{-1bp}{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+                            \textField[\BC{}\presets{\eqe@optsFillIn}]
+                            {\fieldName}{#2}{\fillinTotalHeight}}}\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the user has taken the \texttt{parbox} option, then the text field becomes a multiline
+%    field, with height equal to the requested height.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                            \setlength{\@tempdima}%
+                                {\eqe@opts@argii+2\fboxrule+2\fboxsep}%
+                            \raisebox{-1bp}{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+                            \textField[\BC{}\presets{\eqe@optsFillIn}
+                            \Ff{\FfMultiline}]{\fieldName}{#2}
+                            {\fillinTotalHeight}}}\fi
+                        \fi
+                    \fi
+                \fi
+            \fi
+        }%
+    \fi\endgroup\space\ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macro}{\TF}
+% The \cs{TF} command depends on \cs{fillin}, so we make the appropriate changes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\TF[2][\defaultTFwidth]{%
+    \def\eqe@next{\fillin[underline]{#1}{#2}}%
+    \ifdim\eq@extralabelsep=0pt\relax\else
+        \if\probstar*\relax\if\exerwparts@cols0
+            \def\eqe@next{\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+                \fillin[underline]{#1}{#2}}\ignorespaces}%
+    \fi\fi\fi\eqe@next
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+% This marks the end of the \textsf{eqexam} package. dps
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+\endinput